liil

DESCRIPTIVE
GEOMETRY
KENISON AND BRAULEV

iiilliilliF; lilififjii
 Cornell University Library
QA 501.K33
Descriptive geometry

K33 3 1924 004 029 314

CORNELL
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY

Given to the
COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
\jy the
Sept. of BJachlne-I^eslgn.
^1. o^
 The original of tliis book is in

tlie Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in

the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924004029314
Series of Eexts on ^Topics in lEtigmeerins
lEbtUtJ i)g lEarlc EagmonlJ f^eUrick

DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
NEW YORK BOSTON CHICAGO DALLAS
ATLANTA SAN FRANCISCO
•

MACMILLAN & CO., Limited

LONDON • BOMBAY CALCUTTA
•

MELBOURNE
THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltd.
TORONTO
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY

BY

ERVIN KENISON
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF DRAWING AND DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY
MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

AND

HARRY CYRUS BRADLEY

ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF DRAWING AND DESCRIPTITE GEOMETRY
MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Weto gorfe

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

1917

All rights reaened

 OOPTBIOHT, 1916 AND 1917,

By the MACMILLAN COMPANY.

Set up and electrotyped. Preliminary edition published

October, 1916. Complete edition, October, 1917.

Korinooli ^reee
J. S. Gushing Co. —Berwick & Smith Co.
Norwood, Mass., U.S.A.
 PREFACE
This book represents a teaching experience of more than
twenty years on the part of both of the authors at the Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology. In presenting such a book
for the consideration of other institutions and of the public
at large, it is well to note the relation of this course in de-
scriptive geometry to the general study scheme, in order that
the point of view of the authors may be better understood.
In any professional drawing of an engineering or architec-
tural nature, especially if the element of design occurs, the
draftsman or designer must see clearly the conditions in space.
This has been well expressed by saying that he must be able
to think in three dimensions. Such an ability is natural to
but few. Fortunately, however, it is a power which can be
acquired, more or less readily, by the great majority. This
power can be gained, and it usually is by the so-called " prac-
tical "draftsman, by the simple process of making and re-
making working drawings. But the authors believe that the
same power can be acquired much more rapidly, and when
acquired can be more forcefully and efiiciently applied in de-
signing, through the study of descriptive geometry.
The point of view in this text is therefore that of the drafts-
man. Mathematical formulae and analytic computations have
been almost entirely suppressed. It has been found that the
students readily apply their knowledge of the theoretical
mathematics to a finished drawing. For example, they make
trigonometric computations from drawings with considerable
facility. On the other hand, in applying even the simplest
principles of solid geometry during the construction of a.
drawing the student is often anything but facile. The method
of attack throughout this book is intended to be that which
VI PREFACE

shall most clearly present the actual conditions in space.

Wherever experience has shown that a simple plan and ele-
Yation are not amply sufficient for this purpose, additional
views or projections have been introduced freely, correspond-
ing to the actual drafting practice of making as many side
views or cross sections as may be needed.
In the matter of arranging the views ia a practical drawing,
there has been, still is, and probably always will be, contro-
versy. Architects, who must embellish their drawings with
shades and shadows, as well as some engineers, prefer to place
the plan below the elevation, according to the so-called first

quadrant projection. Entire text-books, noticeably the older

ones, have been prepared with all the objects and all the
theory studied in the first quadrant. Other engineers, me-
chanical especially, insist that the only proper placing of the
views is have the plan above the elevation, according to
to
the method of the third quadrant. In consequence, some
recent text-books have been issued with all the work in the
third quadrant. The authors have no desire to take sides in
this controversy, but believe in giving the student practice
in both of these methods. Hence some of the problems are
studied in the first quadrant, others in the third. It has been
found that the student has no greater difficulty in working in
one quadrant than in the other, while considerable additional
power is gained, and a clearer insight into space in general is
obtained, by not restricting the work to a particular corner
of space.
A requirement of practical drafting is that the construction
shall be confined to the limits of thedrawing board. There
is always a limit beyond which points cannot be made avail-

able. A similar requirement, namely, that all the points used

in the construction must be within the limits of the figure, is
rigidly insistedupon in the authors' classes. This frequently
involves an auxiliary construction not embodied in the gen-
eral theory of the problem. Numerous auxiliary constructions
of this kind are given throughout the book. The additional
grasp of the subject obtained by being obliged thus to force
 PREFACE vil

his way through whatever difficulties may arise, has been

found of great value to the student in his subsequent work.
The amount of ground covered by this book is that which
is considered sufficient to enable the student to begin the
study of the technical drawings of any line of engineering or
architecture. It is not intended to be a complete treatise on
descriptive geometry. Detailed exposition of such branches
as shades and shadows, perspective, stereographic projection,
axonometry, the solution of spherical triangles, etc., will not
be found. The student is prepared by the present text, how-
ever, to take up any of these subjec^ts.
The notation adopted in this book is a modification of that
first suggested and used by Professor William Watson of the
Institute of Technology (around 1870). The modifications
have been made from time to time by the authors in the
course of their teaching experience. The authors have exam-
ined many books and when opportunity offered, they have
;

questioned students coming from other institutions in their

search for a clear system of notation. While the system here
given is not above criticism, the authors are firmly of, the
opinion that the best that has ever come to their attention.
it is

Although book has been prepared with the needs of one

this
particular institution ia mind, it is hoped that it will not be
found wanting in general interest.
ERVXN KENISON,
HARRY CYRUS BRADLEY.
Massachusetts Instittjte op Technology,
September, 1917.
 CONTENTS
Inteodxjction 1

Descriptive Geometry — Definition — Visualization —

Practical Applications.

I. Elembntabt Principles : the Coordinate Planes . 3

OrtliograpliieProjection —
Orth.ograpliic View —
Projection on a Single Plane —
Plane of ff'rojection —
Choice of the Planes of Projection The Horizontal—
and Vertical Coordinate Planes —
Names of the Views
— Plan —
Elevation— Position of the Observer— The
Ground Line — The Four Quadrants — Relation be-
tween an Object and Projections — Relation between
Its
Two Projections an Object — Notation — Actual
of
Projections.

II. Projections of the Point and of Simple Solids . 10

Notation of the Point — Projections of Iscdated Points
in AH Four Quadrants —
Projectors Visualizing the—
Quadrants —
Uses of the Quadrants Distances from —
—
H and V Special Positions of the Point Projections —
of Simple Solids —
Visibility of Solid Objects Illus- —
trative Projections of the Prism, Pj^-amid, Cylinder,
Cone, Sphere, Torus.

III. Representation of the Straight Line Traces : . 19

The Straight Line —
Its Projections Notation —
Vis- —
ualization — Slope —
Special Positions The Profile —
Line — A Point Lying in a Line — Traces of a Line.

Problem 1. To find the traces of a straight line . . 24

Problem 2. Given the two traces of a straight line, to find
its projections 25

IV. Simple Shadows 26

Shadows —
Shadow of a Point —
Opaque and Trans-
parent Planes —
Shadow of a Line Of Surfaces Of — —
a Convex Solid.
X CONTENTS
PAGE
V. Representation op the Plane 29
The Plane —
Representation
Its Traces Notation — —
— Visualization Slope — —
Special Positions Edge —
View.

VI. The Pbopile Plane op Projection

The Profile Plane —A Relation of
Profile Projection
....
—
33

Profile Projection to H- and F-Projections Profile —

Projections in All Four Quadrants —
Profile Projection of
the Straight Line —
Problems on the Profile Line Its —
True Length —
Its Traces on and V H
Projections —
of a Point Lfing in the Line —
Profile Trace of a Line
— Of a Plane —
Left-Side Views Conventional —
Placing of Views —
Second Method of Obtaining Pro-
file Projections.

VII. Secondary Planes op Projection

Secondary Planes of Projection —
The Profile Plane as
.... 46

a Secondary Plane —
Secondary Ground Lines Prin- —
ciples of Secondary Projection —
Simphfication of Prob-
lems — End View of a Line —
Edge View of a Plane
— Secondary Projections of Solids The Two F-Pro- —
jections Compared —
Obhque Secondary Planes.

VIII. Revolution op a Point : True Length of a

Straight Line Applications
: 52
Revolution of a Point about a Straight Line Axis of —
Revolution Perpendicular to or F H
Axis Lying in —
a Given Plane —
True Length of a Line Angles —
which a Line Makes with and F H
Converse Prob- —
lems.
Problem 3. To find the true length of a line (Two
methods) 54, 56
Problem 4. To find the projections of a line of definite
length, when its slope, the angle which it makes with
one coordinate plare, and the direction of its projection
on that plane, are known 58
Problem 5. To find the projections of a line making given
angles with H an4 F 60
 CONTENTS XI

FAOB
IX. Some Simple Intersections : Developments . . 62
Simple Intersections of Solids of Revolution Visibility —
of the Intersection —
A Plane Perpendicular to ff or F
Intersecting a Cone, Sphere, Toms, Hyperbolic Spindle
•
— Developments —
Working Method for Finding the
True Length of a Line —
Development of a Solid with
Plane Faces —
Projection of a Prism Whose Long Edges
Make Given Angles -yith and V. H
X. Lines in a Plane Parallel Lines and Planes
: . 71
Intersecting and Parallel Lines —
Parallel Lines in Space
— Intersecting Lines in Space — Test for Intersecting
Lines — A Line in a Plane — A Plane Containing a
Given Liae — Principal Lines of a Plane — To Pro-
ject the Principal Liaes — A Plane Containing a Line
Parallel to H or F — Parallel Planes — A Line Parallel
-

to a Plane — A Plane Parallel to a line — The Plane

Determined by Two Intersecting Lines, Two Parallel
Lines, a Line and a Point not on the Line, Three Points
not in the Same Straight Line —
Planes Parallel to Lines
or to Other Planes —
Use of Auxiliary Lines in Finding
the Traces of Planes.
Problem 6. To find the plane which contains two given
intersecting or parallel Unes 79
Corollary I. To find the plane which contains a given
line and a given point 82
To
Corollary II. find the plane
given points not in the same straight line ...
which contains three
82
Problem 7. To find the plane which contains a given line
and is parallel to a second given line
Problem 8. To find
....
the plane which contains a given
84

point and is parallel to each of two given lines . . 86

Problem 9. To find the plane which contains a given point
and is parallel to a given plane 86

XI. Pebpendicitlar Lines and Planes

Perpendicular Lines —
Perpendicular Lines Whose Pro-
.... 91

jections are Perpendicular —

A Line Perpendicular to
a Plane —
Test for Perpendicularity of a Line and Plane
. — Perpendicular Planes —
Lines of Maximum IncUna-
Xii CONTENTS
PAGE
tion to H and V — Planes Perpendicular to a Given
Line or Plane.
To
Problem 10.
point and is perpendicular to a given line ...
find the plane whicli contains a given
95
Problem 11. To find the plane which contains a given
and is perpendicular to a given plane .... line
96

XII. Inteesection op Planes and of Lines and Planes :

Applications 98
Intersecting Planes— Line of Intersection Two Planes of
— Intersection of a Line and a Plane — Shortest Dis-
tance from a Point to a Plane — Projection a Point or of
Line on a Plane.
Problem 12. To find the Une of intersection of two planes 98
Problem

Problem
13.
intersects a plane
14. To
........
To find the point in which a straight hne

find the shortest distance from a point to

103

a plane 105
Problem 15. To project a line on an oblique plane . . 106

XIII. Intersection op Planes and Solids Bounded bt

Plane Faces 108
A Plane Determined by Two Lines —
Intersection of a
Line with a Plane Determined by Two Lines Inter- —
section of Two Limited Plane Surfaces —
Visibility —
Intersection of a Plane and a Pyramid —
Of Two Solids
Bounded by Plane Faces —
Of a Sphere and a Prism —
Of a Sph^re and a Right Cylinder —
Of a Cyhnder and
a Torus.

XIV. Problems Involving the Revolution op Planes . 125

A Line Lying in a Given Plane —
A Point in a Plane —
Revolution of a Plane about an Axis Perpendicular to
il or V —Distance between Two Parallel Planes —
Angles between an Obhque Plane and the Coordinate *"

Planes —
Planes making Given Angles with and V. H
Problem 16. Given one projection of a line lying in a plane,
to find the other projection 125
Corollary 7. Given one projection
plane, to find the other projection ....
of a point lying in a
128
 CONTENTS xin

PAGE
Corollary II. To find the second projection of a line
lying in a plane when the general solution fails, partially
or wholly 129
Corollary III. To find a hne of maximum inclination of
a plane 129

two parallel planes

Corollary. To
.......
Problem 17. To find the perpendicular distance between

find the perpendicular distance from a

131

point to a plane 132

Problem 18. To find the angles which an obUque plane
makes with H and V 132
Problem 19. Given one trace of a plane, and the angle
which the plane makes with either H or V, to find the
other trace of the plane 134
H
Problem 20. Given the angles which a plane makes with
and V, to find the traces of the plane .... 135

XV. Other Problems Involving the Revolution op

Planes 139
Revolution of a Plane about One of Its Traces Re- —
volved Position of a Point in a Plane —
Working Rule —
Solution of Plane Problems by Revolution of the Plane
— Angle between Two Intersecting Lines Angle —
between a Line and a Plane —
A Rectihnear Figure
Lying in a Plane.
Problem 21. To find the position of a point lying in a plane,
when the plane is revolved into H or V about the corre-
sponding trace 139
Corollary. To find the revolved position of a Hne lying in
when the plane is revolved into H or V about
a plane,
the corresponding trace
Problem 22. To find the angle
....
between two intersecting
. 142

lines 143
Corollary.

Problem 23.
To
angle between two intersecting lines
To find the angle between a line
....
find the projections of the bisector of the

and a plane
145
147
Problem 24. Given one complete projection, and three
points in the other projection of a plane polygon, to
complete the projection 142
 •

xiv CONTENTS
PAOE
Corollary I.
figure
Corollary II.
..........
To

To
find the true size and shape

which
find the projection of the line
of a plane

bi-
150

sects one of the iaterior angles of a plane polygon . . 151

XVI. MiSCELLANEOTTS PROBLEMS OF THE LiNE AND PlANE 152

Distance from a Point to a Line —
Distance between Two
Lines —
Angle between Two Planes Application.—
Problem 25. To find the shortest (perpendicular) distance
from a point to a line 152
Problem 26. To find the shortest distance between two

Problem 27.
perpendicular
To
.......
hues not in the same plane, and the projections of their
common
find the angle between two planes . .
155
158
Problem 28. Given the horizontal traces of two planes,
and the angle each plane makes with H, to find the line
of intersection of the two planes . . . . .162
Corollary. To find the angle between the given planes 163

XVII. Counter-revolution of Planes

Cbunter-revolution of a Point, a Line, a Plane Figure
....— 164

A Line of Given Length Perpendicular to a Plane —

Projections of a Prism or Pjrramid Whose Axis is In-
clined to Both and V.H
Problem 29. Given the position of a point lying in a plane
after the plane has been revolved into H or V about the
corresponding trace, to find the projections of the point 164
Corollary. To counter-revolve a plane polygon . . 166
Problem 30. At a given point in a plane, to draw a line
which shall be perpendicular to the plane and of given
length 168

XVIII. Tangent Lines and Planes: General Prin-

ciples 174
Curves —
Plane Curves —
Space Curves Projections —
of Curves —
Tangent Lines —
Tangents to Plane Curves
— Tangent Planes to Curved Surfaces Determina- —
tion by Means of Tangent Lines —
Rectilinear Ele-
ments —
The Normal —
Determination of Tangent
Planes by Means of the Normal.
 CONTENTS XV

XIX. Tangent Planes to Cones and Cylinders . . 178

The Cone and Cylinder — Definitions — Representation
— Projections Cones and Cylinders — Projections
of of
a Point in the Surface — Tangent Planes to Cones and
Cylinders at a Given Point the Surface — Through
in
a Given Point without the Surface — Parallel a Given to
Line.
Problem 31. To pass a plane tangent to a cone at a given
point in the surface 184
Problem 32. To pass a plane tangent to a cone through a
given point without the surface. (Two results.) . . 189
Problem 33. To pass a plane tangent to a cone parallel to
a given line. (Two results.) . , 192
Problem 34. To
given point in the surface
Problem 35. To pass a plane tangent
......
pass a plane tangent to a cylinder at a

to a cylinder through
194

a given point without the surface. (Two results.) . 196

Problem 36. To pass a plane tangent to a cylinder parallel
to a given line. (Two results.) 198

XX. Tangent Planer to Double Curved Surfaces of

Revolution 201
Double Curved Surfaces Revolution
of Represen- —
tation —Meridians —
Principal Meridian Plane —
Parallels —
Projections of a Point in the Surface —
— The Sphere —
The Torus —
Tangent Planes to
Double Curved Surfaces of Revolution at a Given Point
in the Surface —
Tangent Planes Which Contain a Given
line.
Problem 37. To pass a plane tangent to a sphere at a given
point in the surface 206
Problem 38. To
pass a plane tangent to a double curved
surface of revolution at a given point in the surface . 207
Problem 39. To
pass a plane tangent to a sjjhere through a
given Une without the surface 212
Problem 40. To pass a plane tangent to a double curved
surface of revolution through a given line. (Special
cases.) 216
xvi CONTENTS
XXI. The Intersection op Curved Surfaces by Planes 219
Classiflcation of Curved Surfaces Ruled Surfaces — —
Surfaces of Revolution —
Other Curved Surfaces In- —
tersection by a Plane of a Ruled Surface Of a Sur- —
face of Revolution —
Of Any Curved Surface Method —
by Means of Secondary Projections — Visibility of the
Intersection — A Rectilinear Tangent to the Curve of
Intersection — Development of a Curved Surface.

XXII. Intersection of Planes with Cones and Cylin-

ders . . 222
Intersection of a Cone gr Cylinder with a Plane A —
Line Tangent to the Section Development of the—
Curved Surface and Tangent Line Intersection of a —
Pyramid or Prism with a Plane.
Problem 41. To find the intersection of a cone and plane 222
Problem 42. To find the intersection of the frustum of a
cone and a plane 232
Prpblem 43. To find the intersection of a cylinder and a
plane . . . . . . . . . . 236
Problem 44. To find the intersection of a pyramid or prism
and a plane 244

XXIII. Intersection of Planes with Surfaces of

Revolution 247
and a Plane
Intersection of a Surface of Revolution —
Points Determined by Meridian Planes A Line Tan- —
gent to the Intersection —
Number of Curves in the
Case of a Torus Intersected by a Plane.
Problem 45. To find the inters*tion of a double curved
surface of revolution and a plane 247

XXIV. The Intersection of Curved Surfaces by

Curved Surfaces 256
Intersection of Two Curved Surfaces — The Auxiliary
Surfaces — VisibiUty of the Intersection — A line
Tangent to the Curve of Intersection.
 CONTENTS xvii

XXV. The Intersection qf Cones and Ctlindeks with

Each Other 258
— Of Two Cones,
Intersections of Cones and Cylinders
Two Cylinders, a Cylinder and a Cone — Auxiliary
Planes Whioli Cut Elements from Each Surface — Num-
ber Curves — General Cases — Special Cases —
of
Limiting Planes Doubly Tangent — Parallel Elements
— InfiniteBrandies — Intersection Cylinders and
of
Cones of Revolution.
Problem 46. To find the intersection of two cylinders . 260
Problem 47- To find the intersection of a cylinder and a
cone 270
Problem 48. To find the intersection of two cones . . 272

XXVI. The Intersection op Various Curved Surfaces 278

Intersection of Two Curved Surfaces of Revolution —
Of a Sphere and a Cone — Of a Sphere and a Cylinder
— Of Any Two Curved Surfaces.
Problem 49. To find the intersection of any two surfaces of
revolution whose axes intersect 278
Corollary. To find the intersection of two smfaoes of rev-
olution whose axes are parallel 280
Problem 50. To find the intersection of a sphere and a cone 282
Problem 51. To find the intersection of a sphere and a
cylinder 284
Problem 52. To find the intersection of any two curved sur-
faces. (General case.) 286
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY
 :

DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY
INTRODUCTION
1. Descriptive Geometry. Descriptive Geometry is an ap-
plied science which treats of the graphical representation of
lines, planes, surfaces, and solids, and of the solution of prob-
lems concerning size and relative proportions. Thus it lies at
the foundation of all architectural and mechanical drafting.
While the study of descriptive geometry does not require
extended mathematical knowledge, and while its operations are
not strictly mathematical, the best results cannot be obtained
without some acquaintance with the principles of plane and
solid geometry.
Descriptive geometry differs from analytic geometry of three
dimensions ia that the solutions are based, not on algebraic
equations, but on drawings. In a certain sense, this greatly
increases the scope of descriptive geometry. By the graphical
processes, objects of any form whatever, no matter how irregu-
lar, or whether any equations for them exist or not, may be

treated. On the other hand, descriptive geometry resembles

analytic geometry in that the drawings, like the equations, are
merely representations of the conditions in space.
By the methods of descriptive geometry the solution of any
problem involving three dimensions consists of three distinct
processes, as follows
(1) Eepresentation of the lines, planes, surfaces, or solids
in space by corresponding plane figures.
(2) Solution of the problem, by the use of the plane figures.
(3) Determination of the relation in space which corresponds
to this solution.
B 1
2 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [§ 1

In order that these processes may lead to a suecessfid result,

evident that it must be possible to pass without ambiguity
it is

from the object in space to its representations, and also with-

out ambiguity from the representations to the object in space
again.

2. Visualization. The process of passing from the repre-

sentations to the object in space is a purely mental one. It
is, by the student at the beginning
therefore, apt to be ignored
of his course, to his detriment later on. The process is called
"visualizing" or "reading" the drawing, and is absolutely
essential in any practical application of descriptive geometry.
(See § 3.) Because of its importance, both in theory and in
practice, considerable emphasis will be laid on visualization
in the present text. The student is advised to accustom him-
self early to look upon his drawings as representations of
conditions in space, and to work out his problem by consider-
ing the space relations involved, rather than by the (plane)
geometrical relations existing in the drawing itself.

3. Practical Application of Descriptive Geometry. In the de-

sign of all engineering and architectural structures, as machines,
bridges, buildings, etc., as well as in many of the less preten-
tious mechanic arts, there comes a time when the forms and
arrangements of the various parts must be considered. The
problem then becomes one which is solved, either wholly or
in part, by the graphical methods of descriptive geometry.
Moreover, the drawings, once made, take the place of written
description, and form the language by means of which the
designer conveys his ideas to the builder or mechanic, who,
after " reading " (visualizing) them, can build or construct
the work.
In addition to the usefulness of descriptive geometry in its

practical applications, it is the conviction of the authors that

its fundamental and educational value lies in its unique power
to develop the mental concept, or visualization, the importance
of which has already been emphasized.
 CHAPTER I

ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES — THE COORDINATE PLANES

4. Orthographic Projection or Orthographic View. The terms
orthographic projection and orthographic view, or more simply
projection and view, are used to denote a drawing which repre-
sents, ia accordance with a certaia artificial and conventional
system of vision hereafter described, some object, surface,
line, point, or. combination of these, that has a definite position
in space. Such a drawing may be made on any plane surface,
as, for example, a sheet of paper or a blackboard.

5. Projection on a Single Plane. In Fig. 1, let Q represent

any horizontal plane in space, and A a square right prism with

Fig. 1.

its bases parallel to the plane. If the prism be looked at

from above, at right angles to the plane, the arrows represent-
ing the lines of sight, the square top, 1-2-3^, will be the only
part seen. If this square be now imagined to drop vertically
until it lies in the plane Q in the position 6-6-7-8, the latter
would be the orthographic projection of the prism on the
plane Q. The plane Q is called a plane of projection. In this
case the projection is a top view of the given object.
3
4 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [I, § 5

In looking at any object naturally, it is a familiar fact that

the lines of sight all converge to the eye. In orthographic
projection, however, this is not the case ; instead, the lines of
sight are allassumed to he parallel, and every view or projec-
tion is made on this basis. On account of this difference, the
resulting views are more or less unlike those seen with the
natural eye. With natural vision, the same object, placed at
varying distances from the eye, appears smaller when farther
away, while in orthographic projection the size of the view or
projection is not affected by the distance of the object from
the observer.
Figures 2-10 show pictorially the projections of objects of
simple form. Figures 2, 3, 4, 6, 6, and 9 are projections on a

Fig. 2.

horizontal plane, and are top views. Figures 7, 8, and 10 are

projections on a vertical plane, and are front views. In each
case the plane Q is a plane of projection.
From these figures it is evident that one view of an object is

not sufficient to determine its size and sha,pe, hence two or

more views or projections, requiring as many planes of pro-
must be used.
jection,

6. Choice of the Planes of Projection ; the Coordinate Planes.

The simplest and most advantageous angle between the planes
is a right angle.
At any given point on the earth's surface, there are two
natural mutually perpendicular directions, which must always
be considered in the applied arts and sciences : the horizontal
or level, as shown by the surface of still water, and the vertical
or plumb, as shown by a freely falling body.
I, §6] ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES

Fig. 6.

>r I III
! il! !

Fig. 7.

Fig. 9. Fig. 10.

6 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [I, § 6

The planes of projection are chosen, accordingly, the first

horizontal, the second perpendicular to the first, and therefore
vertical. These two planes are known as the horizontal and
vertical coordinate planes, respectively, and will be designated
by the letters and V. H
At any given place the horizontal plane is always fixed in
direction, since all horizontal planes are parallel. But any
plane perpendicular to the horizontal is vertical. Hence the
direction of the vertical plane is to some extent arbitrary.

7. Names of the Views. A

view or orthographic projection
made on a horizontal plane of projection, H, is known as a hori-
zontal projection, usually abbreviated to ff-projection. This
term is equivalent to the expression top view which was used
above, and which may still be employed. In practice, however,
it is usually called the plan. Thus, the terms top view, plan,
and horizontal projection are synonymous. Similarly, a view
made on a vertical plane of projection, V, is called a vertical
projection, or a F-projection, or a front view, or an elevation.

8. Position of the Observer with Reference to the Coordinate

Planes. When making a vertical projection or front view, the
observer is in y-plane, and
a position squarely facing the
either above or below H, as the size and position of the object
may require. When making a top view or ^-projection, the
position is as if the observer were to stand on or above the
IP-plane, facing the F-plane, then to bend forward and look
vertically down upon the given object and the horizontal plane.
Except in rare instances, not considered here, the F-plane is
never viewed from the back or further side, nor the if-plane
from underneath.
9. The Ground Line and the Four Quadrants. Let the coordi-
nate planes be chosen as in Figs. 11 and 12. The line of
intersection,OL, of these planes is known as the ground line
— a somewhat unfortunate name, since it is derived from but
one of the properties of the line, and ignores another equally
important property, as will be seen later. The ground line
divides each of the coordinate planes into two parts.
 :

I, § 11] ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES

Although a pictorial representation can show only a limited
portion of each plane, the coordinate planes are supposed
indefinite in extent. Hence they divide the whole of space
into four quadrants, numbered I, II, III, and IV, as follows
QuADBANT I : above H
and in front of (or on the near side
of) V.
Quadrant II : above H and behind (or on the far side
of) V.
Quadkaxt III below and behind V.
: H
Quadrant IV below H and in front of
: V.

10.The Relation between an Object and Its Projection. In

5-6—7-8 of the top of the prism might be
Fig. 1, the projection
obtained by extending the vertical edges of the prism until they
intersect the plane of projection, Q. The point 5 is the pro-
jection of point 1, 6 of 2, and so on.
In general, the (ortho-
graphic) projection of a point on any plane may be defined
as the foot of a perpendicular from the point to the plane.
The projection of any object is composed of the projection
of all its points, found in the same manner.

11. The Relation between Two Projections of an Object. Let

a rectangular card, abed, be placed as shown in Fig. 11. The
card is in the first quadrant, above
H, in front of and parallel to V.
The long edges are vertical, the
short edges parallel to H. The
projection of the card on Fis the
equal rectangle cvh^Ccf, and on H
the straight line d'V'&&', equal in
length to the short edge. The
perpendiculars M" and cZd* deter-
mine a plane which is perpendicu-
lar to both ^and and thereforeF,
Fig. 11.
to their line of intersection, OL.
The same is true for the two perpendiculars from every other
comer of the card. Hence the two projectiovs of any point,
together with the point itself, must always be in the same plane
8 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [I, § 11

perpendicular to OL. This is one of the fundamental relations

of orthographic projection.

12. In this book, projections on the horizontal

Notation.
coordinate plane, H, will be denoted by the small letter, h,
attached as an exponent to the letter or character which denotes
the actual point, line, or object projected. Projections on the
vertical coordinate plane, V, will be similarly denoted by the

Fig. 11 (repeated). Fig. 12.

use of a small letter, 'o, as an exponent. Thus, in Eig. 11, point

a is one corner of the card in space ; the projection of a on fl"

is lettered a* ; of a on F is called a". In Fig. 12, the object. A,

a rectangular block placed in the third quadrant, is projected
on Has A!*, on V as A". Further statements in regard to
the notation will be made from time to time, when necessary.

13. Monge's Method. The use of two mutually perpen-

dicular coordinate planes, as in Figs. 11 and 12, enables us to
represent objects of three dimensions by plane figures. It is
sometimes called Monge's method, after the originator.
Drawings, however, are not made ordinarily on two drawing
surfaces at right angles to each other. A single drawing surface
(paper, cloth, board, etc.) is taken to represent both and V. H
14. Projections. In the pictorial representations, Figs. 1-12,
the planes of projections have been shown limited in extent,
in order to give a clear idea of their position. Actually, the
I, § 14] ELEMENTARY PRINCIPLES
planes are unlimited in extent (§ 9), so that in making pro-
jections no outlines for the coordinate planes are shown.
The projections or yiews of the card of Fig. 11 are given in
Fig. 13. When looking toward V, the horizontal plane will be

:p: D'
 :

CHAPTER II

PROJECTIONS OF THE POINT AND OF SIMPLE SOLIDS

15. Notation of the Point. An isolated point in space will be

denoted, in general, by a small letter. A point lying in a line,
or in the boundary of a surface or solid, will be denoted either
by a small letter or by a number, according to convenience.
The projection of any point on H
or V will be designated by the
suitable use of the small letters h
and V as exponents (§ 12).

16. Projecting Isolated Points.

Let a, Fig. 17, be a point situated
in Quadrant I. By inspection of
the figure, it is seen that this point
projects on H in front
of GL, and

Fig. 17.
on V above OL. Let the points
b, c, d, be placed in Quadrants II,

III, IV, respectively. Visualizing in a similar manner, and

using the notation of § 15, we may make the following table

Quadrant lies in H in front of OL.

a" lies in F above QL.
Quadrant •
II : 6* lies in H behind GL.
6" lies in F above GL.
Quadrant III : c' lies in H behind GL.
c" lies in F below GL.
Quadrant IV : d* lies in H in front of OL.
d' lies in F below OL.
By the method of the single ground line. Fig. 13, the drawing
is divided into two parts by the line OL. The upper part
represents both V above GIj and II behind OL, the lower part
represents both H
in front of GL and F below GL. In this
method, the lines joining a* and a", 6* and b", etc., must be per-
pendicular to GL. The resulting proj actions are given in Fig. 18,
10
II, § 18] POINTS AND SIMPLE SOLIDS 11

17. Projectors. The line aa" or 66", Fig. 11, which projects
the point on the plane of projection, is called a projector. A
line like a'a'', Fig. 13 or Fig. 18, which connects the two pro-
jections of a point in the drawing, also is called a projector.
These two uses of the word rarely cause confusion ; if necessary

I II 111 IV

+ a- +b'<

! ^ t^^

G \
_J I

-IT
I

I I

I
+ C'
I

+d
Fig. 18.

to distinguish, however, the terms space projector, in space, and

ruled projector, in the drawing, may be employed.

18. Visualizing the Quadrants. The propositions of § 16 can

be reversed, and the quadrant in space in which any point lies
can'be told at once from its projections. To do this merely by
memorizing the relations of the two projections to the ground
line is not visualizing in any sense, and is of little or no value.
As the iirst step in visualizing, let us inquire which side of
each of the coordinate planes is represented by the drawing
surface. Regardless of the position of the point or object rep-
resented, this is always the side of the plane which is nearer

to an observer placed in the first quadrant. The same idea is

expressed by saying that the jff-plane is always viewed from
above, and the F^plane from in front (§ 8).
Since the point may be on either side of the coordinate plane
while the drawing is always viewed from the same side, it
follows that it may be necessary to visualize the point in either
of two ways (1) nearer to the observer than its projection,
:

that is, above or in front of the drawing (2) beyond its pro- ;

jection, that is, below or behind the drawing and seen as if

looking through a transparent surface.
12 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [II, § 19

19. Uses of the Quadrants. In Figs. 19-22 an isolated point

isshown placed, successively, in the four quadrants. The re-
marks and deductions apply equally well to any object lying
wholly within the quadrant considered.
First Quadrant (Fig. 19). The point is on the nearer side
of the drawing in each projection. This quadrant is much

, a
11, § 20] POINTS AND SIMPLE SOLIDS 13

as if seen through transparent planes. This quadrant is used

more frequently in practical drafting than any of the others.

+ch

+ 0"

Fig. 21.

FouETH Quadrant (Fig. 22). This is analogous to the

second quadrant, with
M and V reversed. I

It is little used in
practice.

20. Views of a
Prism. The plan and id''

elevation of a hex- +d
agonal right prism
placed in the third
quadrant are given in
Fig. 22.
Fig. 23. The prism
is in a vertical position, its upper base in the Zf-plane. Visualize
the solid in space. The distance y, the length of the prism,
is the height of one end above the
other. The distance x is the dis-
tance between the parallel sides, or
the thickness of the prism.
G This illustrates one of the funda-
mental principles of orthographic
projection: an elevation, or V-%>ro-
jection, shows heights, or distances up
and down ; a plan, or H-projection,
Fig. 23. shows distances from front to back.
 '

14 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [II, § 21

21. Distances of a Point from H and

Let it be required to V.

visualize the point m, Eig. 24. suppose the drawing

First,
paper to represent H\ then m" is ignored, while OL becomes
the S'-projection of the F
coordinate plane. Hence m* shows
m
—n —^
that the point in space is not only La
} front of V, but also at the distance x from V.
Now suppose the drawing paper to repre-
I

i^V — ^
sent V; then m* is ignored, OL becomes
the y-projection of the .If coordinate plane,

I
and m" shows that the point m is at the

I ^ distance y below H.
Conversely, if the distances of the point
FiG*24
in space from H and V are given, the pro-
jections can be located at the given distances from OL.
Which projection is determined by which distance ?

22. Special Positions of the Point. In Eig. 25,

the point e lies in H, and in front of V;
the point/ lies La H, and behind V;

I
r I

_£_ f'^ I ah

Fig. 25.

the point g lies in V

and above H;
the point j lies in both H
and V, that is, in the ground line.
Visualize each of these points.

23. Projections of Simple Solids. Solids bounded by plane

faces, such as prisms, pyramids, wedges, frustums, etc., are
projected by drawing the projections of the straight lines
which form the edges of the solid. Only simple positions of
these solids can be considered at present.
11, § 25] POINTS AND SIMPLE SOLIDS 15

24. Visibility of Solid Objects. In viewing a solid, no matter

from what point of view, only a portion of its surface is visible,
while the rest is invisible. In any projection of a solid, there-
fore, there are usually both full and dotted lines, which repre-
sent respectively visible and invisible edges. The correct
representation of these visible and invisible edges is an essen-
tial part of the projection of any solid. The student's facility
in determining visibility is, to a considerable extent, a measure
of his understanding of the problem.
In visualizing any object or objects, an ^-projection, or plan*
is always viewed from above a F-projection, or elevation, from
;

in front (see § 8). This is true, whatever be the relative posi-

tions of these projections with respect to the ground line, or to
each other.
In a drafting office, the relative position of plan and eleva-
tion is usually prescribed by the custom of the office, so that
it is known by the position on the sheet which view is to

be read as an jy-projectioij, and which as a F-projection.

In studying the theory, however, this is not the case objects ;

may be placed in any position in any quadrant, and some

indication as to which is the fi"-projection and which the V-
projection must always be given. For
the present, we shall do this by the nota-
tion, using the index letters * and " (§ 12).

25. Illustrative Examples. The stu-

dent should visualize the solids projected
in Figs. 26-32, aided by the following
hints. Notice carefully the visibility in
each case, as shown by the full and dotted
lines (§ 24).
Figure 26. First quadrant. A square
right prism. The base is in H, and the
lateral edges are vertical. The .ff-projec-
tion shows the true size of the base, the
Fig. 26.
distance of each lateral edge from V, and
the angle between each lateral face and V. The F-projection
shows the altitude of the prism.
 16 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [II, § 25

Figure 27. Tliird quadrant. A rectangular right prism. The

. base is parallel to H, and the lateral edges are vertical. The
fl^projection shows the true size of the base, and its position
(angles, distances) with respect to V. The F-projection shows
the altitude of the prism and its distance from H.
Figure 28. Fourth quadrant. A
triangular right prism:
The base is parallel to V, and the lateral edges are per-
pendicular to V. The F-projection shows the true size and
shape of the base, and its position with respect to H. Note
that the base is not a regular (equilateral) triangle. The
if-projection shows the length of the prism and its distance
from F.
Figure 29. Second quadrant. A square right pyramid. The
base is H. The ^-projection shows its size and
parallel to
position. The F-projection shows the distance of the base from
H, and the altitude of the pyramid.
Figure 30. Third qiiadrant. A pentagonal right pyramid.
The base is parallel to H. The apex is below the base, so that
the pyramid is inverted. The base is a regular pentagon. One
edge of the base is perpendicular to F, so that one of the lateral
faces projects on Fas a straight line.
Figure 31. First quadrant. A
frustum of a regular hexag-
onal pyramid. The lower base of the frustum is in H, the
upper base is parallel to H. In order to aid in the visualization
of the frustum, the complete pyramid is shown in light dotted
lines.
Figure 32. Quadrant indeterminate. An irregular triangular
pyramid. This solid may be constructed by assuming any four
points in space, and then connecting each point with the other
three, thus forming a solid bounded by four triangular faces.
In visualizing this pyramid, any one of the four points may be
taken as the vertex, and the other three points as the corners
of the base.
In Fig. 32, no ground line is shown ; hence the distances
of the object from and H F cannot be told. Nevertheless, the
projections represent a pyramid of definite size and shape
(compare § 14, Figs. 15 and 16).
II, § 25] POINTS AND SIMPLE SOLIDS 17

Fig. 27. Fig. 28. Fig. 29.

Fig. 30. Fig. 31. Fig. 32.

 :

18 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [II, § 26

26. Curved Solids. In projecting solids bounded partly or

wholly by curved surfaces, the projection cannot always be
made wholly of edges of the solid, but may consist partly
or wholly of the apparent outline or contour of the object.
A few typical curved solids are represented in Figs. 33-38.

Fig. 33. Fig. 34. Fig. 35. Fig. 36.

No ground shown, but the objects are

line is all supposed to be
in the first quadrant
A — A circular right cylinder.
B — A circular right cone.
C— A sphere.
D—A hollow hemi-
sphere, or hemispherical
bowl.
E — A torus. This is the
solid generated by revolv-
ing a circle about an axis
situated in its own plane,
but outside the circle.
F— A spool, consisting
of a cylindrical body, coni-
cal ends, and with a cy-
lindrical hole lengthwise
Fig. 37 through it.
 :

CHAPTER III

REPRESENTATION OF THE STRAIGHT LINE — TRACES

27. The Straight Line. A line is the path of a moving point,

and is not necessarily straight. Yet in ordinary use, the term
line, by itself, and without anything to imply the contrary,

always means a straight line.

28. Projections of the Straight Line (Fig. 39). Let cd be any
straight line, and Q any plane of projection. Then as a point

Fig. 39.

moves along the line from c to d, its projection will move along
the plane from c" to d". The following propositions are evident
1. The projection of a straight line is a straight line.
2. Tlie projection of any point in the line lies in the projection

of the line.
Since any point in space is definitely determined when its

projections on jBTand Fare known, it follows that, in general,

any two straight lines assumed at random, one iu H and one in.

V, are the projections of one and only one straight line in

space. Certain exceptions will be noted in § 34.

29. Notation of the Straight Line. A straight line of deiinite

length will be given by the two points at its extremities, as the
line cd (c'd*, cd'). A straight line of indefinite length will be
denoted by a single capital letter. This letter alone denotes
the line in space, and the letter with a suitable index indicates
a projection. Thus we shall say the line A, or the line B{B'', B").
19
 .

20 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [III, § 30

30. Visualizing the Straight Line. The following example

illustrates a general method of visualization. A single projec-
tion, as we have seen, is not sufficient to locate a poLut or line
in space. By a constant comparison of one projection with the
other, however, a suf&cient number of facts are brought out to
complete the mental picture of the conditions in space.
Consider the line A, Fig. 40. In visualizing or " seeing " the
line ia space, either the fl'-projection or the F-projection may
be used first as a basis. As the natural position of the drawing
surface is horizontal, let the ^-projec-
tion be chosen first. Then in viewing
the line A from above, the line in space
is either directly over or directly under
A'', or else partly above and partly below-
Visualizing in this direction alone, how-
'" ever, can give no idea whether the line
is parallel or oblique to the Z?-plane. Bj now lookiug toward
V, and seeing the line in space projecting as A°, the fact is
revealed that the left-hand end of the line is the higher, and
that, reading from this end, the direction or slope of the line
in space is downward to the right. Returning to the fl"-projec-

tion, and reading along the line in the same direction, namely,
from left to right, the line is seen to slopeaway from the
observer, that is, backward. Finally, by comparison of the
two projections, we find that the left-hand end of the line is in
the first quadrant, the right-hand end in the third, the central
portion in the second quadrant (§§ 16, 19).

31. The Slope of a Line. In determining the slope of a line,

the directions up and down, right and left, both of which are

shown by the y-projection, rarely trouble the student. Ihe

directions forward and backward, however, which are always
shown by the JEf-projection, often cause confusion. This diffi-

culty should disappear by considering the method of projecting

a solid object ; for in projecting any actual object, the side
nearest the observer is always considered to be the front of the
object (see §§ 20, 24). A point which is farther away from
Ill, § 32] STRAIGHT LINES 21

the observer behind one which is nearer ; so that the direc-

is

tion from frontto back is away from the observer. This is

shown in Fig. 41 by the arrow
A, which points away from the
observer, and therefore points
backward. The arrow B in this
figure points toward the ob-
server, and is pointing forward.
Points in the first and fourth
quadrants are always in front of
points in the second and third
quadrants ; but points on the
same side of the F-plane must Fig. 41.

be read by the relative positions of their i?-projections, the

lower side of an ZT-projection being always the front.
The slope of the line A, Fig. 40, would
be described as downward, backward, to
the right. The slope may also be given as
upward, forward, to the left, since it is im-
material in which direction the line is read.

32. Additional Examples. Line B, Fig.

Fig. 42. 42. Read in the manner already described,
it will be found that this line is oblique to H and V, passes
through the fourth, third, and second quadrants, and slopes
upward, backward, to the right (or .

downward, forward, to the left). '

Line A, Fig. 43. The F-projection

is parallel to the ground line, so that

every point of the line is the same dis-

tance from H. The line A is parallel
to H, oblique to V, passes through
Fig. 43.
the second and first quadrants only,
and slopes forward to the right (backward to the left).

Note. Lines parallel to H are known as ^-parallels ; lines parallel to

V are known as F-parallels. A line parallel to H may also be called a

horizontal line ; but the corresponding term, vertical line, is limited to a

line perpendicular to S. H- and T-parallels are very important lines.
22 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [III, § 33

33. Special Positions of the Line. The student should satisfy

himself of the truth of the following propositions by direct
visualization.
1.If a line, A intersects
the ground line, A'' and A'
intersect on QL, and in the
same point as A (Fig. 44).
2. Conversely, if A'' and

A" intersect the ground line

in the same point, the line A intersects the ground line. Through
how many quadrants does
such a line pass ?
3. If a line A is parallel
to H, A" is parallel to the
ground line; and conversely,
if A" is parallel to the ground
line, A is parallel to H (Fig.
Fig. 45.
43).
4. If A is parallel to V, A'' is parallel to the ground line ; and
conversely, if A'' is parallel to the ground
line, A is parallel to F'(Fig. 45).
5. If A is perpendicular to H, A" is

B" perpendicular to the ground line, and .4* is

a point; conversely, if A'' is a point, A is

perpendicular to H. (See line A, Fig. 46.)
6. If isA perpendicular to V, A'' is
perpendicular to the ground and A"
line,
is a point; conversely, if A" a point, A is
is
Fig. 46.
perpendicular to V. (See line B, Fig. 46.)
7. If A lies in H, A'* coincides with A, while
A" coincides with the ground line (Fig. 47).
The statements of the analogous and converse
propositions are left to the student.
34. Exceptional Cases. While in general
(§ 28) the two projections of a line may be
assumed in any direction at random, certain exceptions are
illustrated by the following examples :
Ill, § 34] STRAIGHT LINES 23

(a) (Fig. 48). The projection ^* is perpendicular to the

ground line, while the projection A" is not. Assume on A''
any point c*, and find C by projecting to A". The projector
cV coincides with A'', hence c" is always the same point on A",
no matter where c* is chosen. Now let d' be any point on A"
except C. The projector from c?" is parallel to A'', and there

Td'

I Id

di

,h -d'
..c>> I

Fig. 48. Fig. 49. Fig. 50.

is no point d* to correspond with d". Hence there is no line in

space to correspond with the given projections.
An analogous case arises if A' is taken perpendicular to the
ground line, while A'' is not.

(6) (Fig. 49). The and B", are both perpen-

projections, B''
dicular to the ground line, but at different points. Let c* be
any point on B' the projector from c* is parallel to B", and
;

there is no point on B" to correspond with c\ Similarly, if d"

is any point on B", the projector from d' is parallel to 5*, and

there is no point dK Therefore there is in space no line B

corresponding to these two projections.
(c) (Fig.. 50). The projections C* and G^are both perpendicu-
lar to the ground line, and at the same point. Let a' be any
point on C* The projector from a* coincides with C", and the
particular point, a", on C", which corresponds with a* cannot
be determined. The line C is therefore indeterminate. But
if the line be projected by means of two of its points (§ 29), it

at once becomes determined. Thus the line de, Fig. 60, is a

definite line, lying in a plane perpendicular to the ground line.
24 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [III, § 35

35. The Profile Line. A plane which is perpendicular to

the ground line is known and any line lying
as a profile plane,
in a profile plane is termed a profile line. We have just seen
that such a line cannot be projected in the same way as the
general straight line. Hence problems in which such lines
occur will usually — but not always — call for particular solu-

tions. The simplest method of dealing with a profile line is

usually by means of an additional plane or projection. The
solution of cases involving such lines
will be deferred, in general, until Chap-
ter VI, where this topic is considered.

36. A Point Lying in a Line (Pig.

61). It follows at once from the
second proposition of § 28, that if a
point lies in a line, the projections
of the point lie in the projections
^^°- ^^- of the line. This condition is sufB-
cient if the line does not lie in a profile plane. (See § 35.)

37. Traces of a Line. Of all the points

in a straight line, the two in which it
.pierces the planes of projection are con-
sidered the most important. These
points are called the traces of the line.
The horizontal trace is the point in which
the line pierces H, and will be designated
as the point s ; the vertical trace, in which
the line pierces V, will be called Fig. 52.
t.

Problem 1. To find the traces of a straight line.

Analysis. The solution of this problem depends on direct

visualization.
General Case. Line not lying in a profile plane.
Construction (Figs. 52, 53). The horizontal trace. Looking
towards V, is H seen edgewise as GL, the line A appears as
A", hence the line A will pierce H at the point seen as s',

where A' crosses OL. While this projection conveys no idea

of the distance of the point in H from F, it does single out, to
 : ;;

Ill, § 38] STRAIGHT LINES 25

the exclusion of every other point, the H piercing point of the

line. The actual position of the point in H found at by
is s*

the projector s"^.

The vertical trace. Looking down
toward H, V is seen edgewise as GL, A
is seen as A'', hence A is seen to pass

through V at the point t\ The actual

location, t", in V, is found on A" by
means of the projector t*r. Fig. 53.

Special Case. A profile line (no figure). The general solution

evidently fails ; the solution will be given in Chapter VI.
Problem 2. Given the two traces of a straight line, to find its
projections.

Analysis. Each trace is a point lying in a coordinate plane

and for such a point, one projection is identical with the point,
the other projection is in the ground line.
Construction (Figs. 52 and 53). The traces s* and i° are given
s" and i* are found by projection on GL; s*
f and determine A'', s" and t" determine A".
t''

If s* and f lie in the same projector (Fig.

54), the required line is a profile line. Note
that this is a definite line, since two points,

'F-
"
s and t, are known.

38. Exceptional Cases. The solution to

Problem 2 shows that, in general, a straight
line is uniquely determined by its two traces.
The only exception is the case in which s and t

fall together as a single point on the ground

The required line can then be any line
line.
Fig. 54.
which passes through this point in order to ;

determine the line, some other condition must be given.

The following questions on traces are left to the student
1. How must a line be placed so as to have but one trace ?

2. Hew must a line be placed so as to have no trace ?

3. How must a line be placed so that its horizontal (or ver-

tical) trace is indeterminate ?

 CHAPTEfl IV
SIMPLE SHADOWS

Shadows. The shadow of a point on a plane is the point

39.
in which a ray of light passing through the given point is in-
tercepted by the plane.
The conventional ray of light is a line sloping downward,
backward, to the right, with both projections inclined at 45°
with the ground line. Such a ray is shown by the line L,
Fig. 55.

40. Shadow of a Point. The shadow on V of the point a,

Fig. 55, is the point, a„ in which the ray of light, L, passing

through a, intersects V. The shadow
on H is the point, a„ where L pierces H.

It will be noted that the points o,

and a, are the traces (§ 37) of the line
i on F and H
respectively. Hence
the shadow of a point on the coordinate
planes is found by drawing through
the point a line representing the ray
of light, and then finding the traces
of this line.

41. Oblique and Transparent Planes.

In order that an actual shadow may
Fig. 55.
be cast, it is necessary that the plane
receiving the shadow be opaque. Thus, in Fig. 55, if V be con-
sidered opaque, a, is the actual shadow of the point a but if ;

V be considered transparent and H

opaque, a, will be the
actual shadow. In work with shadows, it is customary to
place the object in the first quadrant, and to consider both
//and 'Fas opaque.
Since the two projections of the ray of light make equal
angles with the ground line, it follows that the actual shadow
26
IV, § 43] SIMPLE SHADOWS 27

of a point must always fall on the nearer coordinate plane. In

the case of a solid object, the actual shadow may fall wholly on
H, wholly on V, or partly on both planes, according to the size
and position of the object.
42. Shadow of a Line. The shadow of a line will consist of the
shadows of the points which compose the line. If the line is
straight, only the shadows of the two ends of the line need be
cast. In Fig. 56, the actual shadows of both points a and h fall
on V ; hence the shadow of the line a.b is the line afi„ lying

wholly in V. In Fig. 57, the actual shadow falls partly on H

and partly on V. To find this shadow, we may find the com-
plete shadow on each plane, regarding the other plane as trans-
parent, and then take the actual portion of each shadow. But
the two shadows, ajb, and ap„ one in H
and one in V, must in-
tersect in a point, e, ia OL, since this line is the intersection of
the planes H
and V. Hence we may find one complete shadow,
as a,6,, note the poiat e in. which ajb, crosses OL, and draw from
e to the actual shadow a,.

43. Shadows of Surfaces. Shadows of surfaces and solids are

found by extending the methods just given for the point
and straight line. The only other case which will be taken
up at this time is that of a convex solid bounded by plane
faces.
28 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [IV, § 44

44. Shadow of a Convex Solid. A frustum of an irregular

triangular pyramid (Fig. 58) has six corners and nine rectilinear
edges. Not all of them shadows which lie on the boundary
cas.t

of the complete shadow. Pind the shadows of the six corners 1,

2 ... 6 on one of the planes, as II, and draw the largest convex

Fig. 58

polygon possible, with three or more of these shadow points as

vertices. In Fig. 68, the shadow is the polygon 1,2,5,6.4,1,,
the point 3, being omitted because it falls inside the polygon.
The part l.e/4, on H
in front of GL is an actual shadow the ;

remaining part, e2,5,6,/, shows the portion of the shadow

intercepted by V. Find the actual shadows on V
of the points
2, 5, and 6 then e2i5fitf is the part which falls on V, and
;

completes the actual shadow.

 CHAPTER V
REPRESENTATION OF THE PLANE

45. Representation of the Plane. It has been shown (§ 28)

that a straight line of indefinite extent can be represented by
two orthographic projections on If and on V.
This method, however, cannot be extended to the representa-
tion of a plane of indefinite extent, since the projections of
all the points in the plane would, in general, cover the whole
plane of projection.
It has been shown, however (§ 38), that a line of indefinite
extent may also be determined by its points of intersection
with the planes of projection.
This method is capable of extension to the representation of
a plane.

46. Traces of a Plane. A plane of indefinite extent will, in

general, cut H and V in two straight which meet in the
lines,

point in which the given plane cuts the ground line.

These lines of intersection of the plane with H
and V are
called, respectively, the horizontal and vertical traces of the given
plane.
Conversely, two arbitrary straight lines, one in H
and one in
V, which intersect the ground line at the same point, determine
a plane of which the arbitrary lines are the horizontal and ver-
tical traces.
Thus a definite method of representation of the plane has
been found.
This method of representation fails only in the case in which
the plane contains the ground line, when the two traces will
coincide with each other and with the ground line. In this
case the plane will not be determined until some additional
condition is imposed.
Compare this with the analogous case of a line having coin-
cident traces, § 38.
29
30 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [V, § 47

47. Notation of the Plane. A plane in space will be denoted

by a single capital letter, taken usually from the middle or
end of the alphabet.
The horizontal trace of a plane Q, being the line of intersec-
tion of H and Q, will be called HQ.
The vertical trace, or intersection of V and Q, will be called
VQ.
The form HQ is used in preference to the form QH, since the
latter, in speech, might be confused with Q*, the fi^projection
of a line Q, which is by no means the same thing as the fi^trace

of a plane Q.

48. Visualization of the Plane. The visualization of a plane

from its traces is an entirely diiferent process from reading
the projections of a line or of a point. The traces of a plane
oblique to H and V are not projections of the plane in the
ordinary sense.
Let HQ and VQ, Fig. 59, be the horizontal and vertical traces
of a given plane Q.

Fig. 59. Fig. 60.

Since the plane is iadefinite in extent and cuts the ground

must pass into all four quadrants.

line, it
Since the two traces are oblique to GL, it follows that the
plane determined by them is oblique to both and V. H
49. The Slope of a Plane. The slope of an oblique plane is de-
scribed in the same terms as the slope of a line, and may perhaps
be best understood by reference to the planes of Figs. 69-63.
V, § 49] REPRESENTATION OF THE PLANE 31

Plane Q shown pictorially in Eig. 60, would be

in Fig. 59,
said to slope downward, forward, and to the left (or upward,
backward, to the right).
In Eig. 61 the slope is downward, backward, to the left (ab-
breviated to D.B.L.).

Fig. 61.

In Eig. 62, the slope is downward, forward, to the right

(D.F.R.).

/
32 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY IV, § 50

50. Special Positions of the Plane. The student should satisfy

himself of the truth of the following propositions by direct
visualization.
1. If a plane, Q, is no H-trace (i.e. HQ
parallel to H, there is
does not exist), whileVQ ground
is parallel to the
line.

2. Conversely, if Q has no H-trace, VQ must be parallel to the

ground line, and Q is parallel to H.

3. Similarly, if Q is parallel to V, VQ does not exist, while

HQ is parallel to the ground line; and conversely.

4:. If Q is parallel to ground line, HQ and VQ are also
the
parallel to the ground and conversely.
line ;

5. If Q is perpendicular to H, VQ is perpendicular to the

ground line ; if Q is perpendicular to V, HQ is perpendicular
to the ground line ; and conversely in each case.

6. If Q is perpendicular to both H and V, that is, perpen-

dicular to the ground line, HQ and VQ fall together in the same
perpendicular to OL.

51. Edge View of a Plane. The particular position of a plane

in which it becomes perpendicular to one of the coordinate

VR

Fig. 63 (repeated).

planes is an important one to visualize. If Q is perpendicular

to H, then the JEf-projection of every point in Q must fall in
HQ, which thus becomes an actual projection of the plane. The
trace HQ is, in fact, an edge view of the plane Q (Fig. 63). It
should be noted that a plane parallel to one of the coordinate
planes is necessarily perpendicular to the other, and that the
single trace of such a plane is its edge view (plane B, Fig. 63).
 CHAPTER VI
THE PROFILE PLANE OF PROJECTION

52. The Profile Plane. The profile plane, when used as a

plane of projection, will be designated by the letter P. This
plane has already been defined as a plane perpendicular to the
ground line (§35), that is, Pis perpendicular to both If and
V. Hence the three planes H, V, and P form a system of
mutually perpendicular planes (Fig. 64), intersecting in a

HV/'

/ 1
!/
/
/ <—/-

Fig. 64.

common point o,and intersecting each other by pairs in three

mutually perpendicular lines, H.V, HP, and VP, all passing

through o. The intersection, HV, of ^and Fis the ground line.

53. A Let the model of some familiar
Profile Projection.
object, such as a cabin, be placed on the horizontal plane in
the first quadrant. Fig. 64. Let the front and back be parallel
to the F-plane, and the ends parallel to P. Let a view be tSiken
34 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VI, § 53

looking in the direction of the arrow, that is, from right to left.
In such a view, the whole surface of P will be seen, while the

Fig. 64 (repeated).

F-plane will be seen edgewise as a vertical line, the if-plane

edgewise as a horizontal line, and only the right-hand end of
the cabin will appear.
The actual end view is shown in Eig. 65. No boundary is
shown in this figure for the P-plane, since it, like the H- and

/\

Fig. 65.

F-planes, is of indefinite extent.The quadrants will appear

as indicated by the numbers, and must always so appear whe|i
P is viewed from the right. In this end or profile view of
VI, § 54] THE PROFILE PLANE 35

the cabin, both heights and widths, or, in other words, all dis-

tances perpendicular to ^ or to V areshown in their true

size. Hence in this view the actual distances from the object
to H and to V are necessarily shown.
54. Relation of the Profile Projection to the H- and V-Pro-
jections. Figure 66 shows the construction of the end view, or

rie
36 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VI, § 55

55. A Second Example. Let it be required to draw the

plan, elevation, and side elevation (profile projection) of a
piano packing case placed in the third quadrant, with its
long edges parallel to both H
and V. The dimensions of
the case and its distances from H and V are supposed to be

Plan

TT
I

View
of
i-ight
hand
end

Elevation

Fig. 67.

known. The end view is drawn first at A" (Fig. 67), located
as shown in the third quadrant, and at the given distances,
k from H
and m from V. The plan and elevation may then
be readily constructed as shown. It is important to see
clearly why all the long edges appear visible both in plan and
elevation.

56. Profile Projections in All Four Quadrants. Figures 68-71

show a regular triangular prism placed successively in the
four quadrants. The long edges of the prism are parallel to
both H
and V, and in each quadrant the upper front lateral
face makes an angle of 15° with H. In each position the rights
hand end is shown in the profile view. The student should
visualize the prism for each of the four positions, noting espe-
cially the visibility of the edges lettered B' and C", lettered
also in the profile view as the points 5" and C^.
VI, § 56] THE PROFILE PLANE 37

2d Quadrant

Fig. 68. Fig. 69.

3d Quadrant 4th Quadrant

FiQ. 70. Fig. 71.

38 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VI, § 57

a.
>
VI, § 58] THE PROFILE PLANE 39

A second example is shown in Fig. 74. This is the more

common construction, the profile plane of projection being
taken directly through the given line.

(c) The projections of a point on the line.

Analysis. If the profile projection of the line be found, we

Q.
>
 :

40 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VI, § 59

59. Profile Trace of a Line. The general line, oblique to H,

V, and P, will pierce all these planes. Hence, besides the

horizontal trace s, and the vertical trace t, it will have a profile

trace, w, which must lie in the profile projection of the line.

Given the horizontal and vertical projections of a general line,
to find its profile projection and profile trace.
Analysis. The profila projection of any straight line can be
obtained from its horizontal and vertical projections by finding
the profile projections of any two points in the line (§ 57).
The profile trace can be found by noting the point in which
the given line pierces the edge view of P.
Construction (Fig. 76). A'' and A° are the given projections.

Eind the points s and t, the H- and y-traces of the line A

(Prob. 1, § 37). Project s to s" in OL, and t to f ia VP s" ;

and f determine the required profile projection A". Since

Fig. 76.

HP and VP are both edge views of P, we have m' and m" as

the JET- and F-projections of the point u ; from jt* and m" find
u", the actual profile trace. As a check, u'' must lie in A''.
Since any two of its projections are sufficient to determine
the line A, we have the following proposition
Corollary. Given A" and either A'' or A'; to find the
remaining projection and the three traces of the line.
VI, § 60] THE PROFILE PLANE 41

Analysis. The desired result may be obtained by reversing

the preceding construction.
The construction is left to the student.

60. Profile Trace of a Plane. A plane not parallel to P will

intersect it, and the liae of iaterseetion is known as the profile
trace of the plane.

Fig. 77.

A general plane Q is shown iu Eig. 77, intersecting H, V,

and P, in the traces HQ, VQ, and PQ. It is evident that HQ
and VQ intersect on HV
(the intersection of and V, or H
ground line), HQ and PQ intersect on HP, and VQ and PQ

FlQ. 78.

iatersect on VP. Whence, if HQ and VQ are given, PQ may

be found as shown in Fig. 78.
42 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VI, § 60

The profile trace of a different plane, R, is found in Fig 79.

Fig. 79.

The profile trace of a plane parallel to the ground line is

found in the same way, as shown in Fig. 80. This is an im-

V
 ;

VI, § 61] THE PROFILE PLANE 43

and is determined by the coincident traces HT, VT, and the

point c lying in the plane. To find the profile trace PT, find
first the profile projection c'', of the point c. Then, as in the
preceding ease, PT is an edge view of T, and therefore passes
through C and o. It will be seen that the plane T is definitely
determined by its three traces HT, VT, and PT.
Instead of being determined by passing through the point c,
the plane T might also have been determined by stating the
quadrants through which it passes, and the angle between T

and either H or V. Then the profile trace, PT, could have

been located accordingly.
From Figs. 78-81 it is evident that the three traces of a
plane are so related that if any two are given, the third can be
found. The eases in which the given traces are the profile
trace and either the horizontal or vertical trace, to find the
remaining trace, are left to the student.

61. Planes Parallel to or V. H

A plane parallel to IT or V
has no trace on one of these planes, and the student sometimes
has difficulty in constructing the profile trace. Such a plane
may be regarded as a limiting case of the plane S, Fig. 80
but the result may be obtained by direct visualization, as fol-
lows. Since the plane is perpendicular to P, the profile trace
will be its edge view. Then the profile projection shows the

PQ. VQ

HR

Fig. 82. Fig. 83.

edge views of both H

and V, to the proper one of which the
plane will show parallel.
H
A plane parallel to is shown in Fig. 82 one parallel to V ;

in Fig. 83.
44 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VI, § 62

62. Left-side Views. Hitherto, the profile projection has

been obtained in just one way. Hence the student might
suppose that the method of projecting on the profile plane is as
invariable as that of projecting on or V. H
In practice, how-
ever, this is not the case. The method thus far adopted, when
applied to an actual object, always gives a view of its right
side whereas a view of the left side may be decidedly prefer-
;

a'+- -+a'

0."+-

Fig. 84.

able. For P is viewed from its left side, that is,

this purpose,
from and then projected so as to bring this side
left to right,
into the drawing surface. This method is shown for a point in
the first quadrant in Eig. 84. That this method is directly
opposite to that previously used is shown also by the line ah,
Fig. 85. Since the H- and F-proj actions of a and 6 show that

these points are in the first and fourth quadrants respectively,

the quadrants must appear in the profile projection as marked.
In Eig. 86 the profile trace of the same plane Q is obtained,
first,by looking from right to left, and then by looking from
VI, § 64] THE PROFILE PLANE 45

left to right. Note that, since HQ is at 45° with the ground

line, PQ coincides with VQ in the first figure, and that the

Fig. 86.

second figure is much the clearer, especially if some further

construction is to be made with the plane Q.
Hereafter we shall view P from either side ; although, other
things being equal, the direction from right to left will be pre-
ferred. If the quadrants are numbered in every profile projec-
tion, there should be no confusion, whichever view is used.

63. Conventional Placing of Left-side Views. When the pro-

file projection of a solid object is made so as to show its left

side, it is customary to place this projection at the right of the

front elevation when the object is located in the first quadrant,
and at the left of the front elevation when the object is located
in the third quadrant. This is the reverse of the method of
placing the view of the right side, as shown in Figs. 68 and 70.
(See § 54.) Actual objects are rarely placed in the second or
fourth quadrants, so that there is no fixed custom for locating
such views.

64. Second Method of Obtaining Profile Projections. Profile

projections may be constructed also by treating the profile
plane as a secondary plane of projection, by the methods of the
next chapter. Such a construction is less common, however,
than that given above, since the resulting position of the profile
projection is not so generally satisfactory.
 CHAPTER VII

SECONDARY PLANES OF PROJECTION

65. Secondary Planes In practical work, views

of Projection.
of objects are often wanted which
in other directions than those
are obtained by the use of the horizontal and vertical coordinate
planes. In fact, it often happens that an actual object cannot
be adequately represented by a simple plan and elevation. In
the theory, also, an additional projection in a suitably chosen
direction may give readily a solution otherwise difficult to ob-
tain. Such views, or projections, are obtained on secondary
planes of projection, taken perpendicular to either or V, and H
making any angle whatever with the other coordinate plane.
Secondary planes of projection are by preference taken per-
pendicular to H, for while any plane perpendicular to is H
vertical, a plane perpendicular to V and oblique to is neither H
vertical nor horizontal, and therefore does not conform to either
of the natural directions (§ 6).

66. The Profile Plane as a Secondary Plane. A very impor-

tant secondary plane of projection is the profile plane, which is

perpendicular to both H and V. This plane has just been

discussed in detail in the preceding chapter. Indeed, some
writers consider this plane as a third coordinate plane of equal
rank with the horizontal and vertical coordinate planes. In
the present chapter, the profile plane will be considered as a
special case of a plane perpendicular to H.

67. Secondary Ground Lines.The method of projecting on

a secondary vertical plane shown- in Mgs. 87 and 88. The
is

secondary plane Vi intersects ^

in a secondary ground line,
O^Li, which may be at any angle with the original ground
line OL. Since the projectors aa'° and aa{°, Fig. 87, are both
parallel to H, the distances a'e and a^'e^ are equal, both being
equal to aa'', the distance of the point from H.
46
VII, § 68] SECONDARY PLANES OF PROJECTION 47

68. Principles of Secondary Projections. In general for any

secondary vertical plane of projection we have the following
propositions :

Fig. 87. Fig. 88.

1. The plane may be viewed from either side, irrespective of

the position of the object, but the direction of sight must always
be at right angles to the plane (§ 5), and the projectorsmust be
drawn at right angles to G^Li.
2. Distances above H must be laid off on the farther side of
GjLi, and distances below H on the near side.

3. All vertical distances, either above or below H, remain

unchanged.
4. Hence, if we have given the plan and elevation of any point,
ivhether it be an isolated point, one end of a line, or a corner
of a solid, the secondary V-projection may be obtained as follows :

(a) Decide from which side the secondary F-plane is to be

viewed.
(&) Draw a projector from the fl"-projection of the point per-
pendicular to the secondary ground Ime.
(c) Take the distance from H,- and mark it off
of the point
on the farther side of GiLi is above H, and on the
if the point
near side if the point is below. Thus, in Eig. 87, Vi is viewed
in the direction of the arrow, and the projection ai'bi" can be
laid off only on the side of GiLi as shown. Conversely, if the
secondary projection a^'bi^ is constructed as iaEig. 88, it follows
that Vi is viewed from the side indicated by the arrow, Eig. 87.
48 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VII, § 69

69. Additional Examples. Additional examples of projec-

tions on a secondary F-plane are given in Figs. 89 and 90. In

Pig. 89, note that the directions of the points a and b from
H, as shown by the relations of a" and b' to OL, must be pre-
served in the secondary
d'l projection. In Fig. 90 a
profile line is shown pro-
jected on a profile plane
by this method. (See
G §§ 64, 66.)

70. Simplification of
Problems by Means of

Secondary Projections. In
the solution of a problem,
there is no advantage in
introducing a secondary
plane of projection unless
the new projection is in
some way simpler than
the original projections.
A point always projects as a point, and cannot be made
any simpler.
VII, § 70] SECONDARY PLANES OF PROJECTION 49

The simplest projection of a straight line is a point. This

projection can be obtained by a single secondary plane of projec-
tion only when the given line is parallel to one of the original
coordinate planes. Let the line A (Pig. 91) be parallel to H;

Fig. 91. Fig. 92.

then if GiLi is taken perpendicular to A'', the line A will be

seen endwise, and the projection Ai' will become a point.
Another simple and useful projection of a straight line re-
sults when the line is parallel to a plane of projection. This
can always be attained by means of a secondary F-plane, by
taking OiLi parallel to the fi'-proj action of the line, as shown
in Pigs. 88, 89, and 90.
The simplestposition of a plane is that in which one trace
is an edge view of the plane. Such a view can always be ob-
tained by means of a secondary vertical plane of projection.
Let Q, Pig. 92, be a general plane. Assume a secondary ground
line GiLi perpendicular to HQ. Then, since HQ is perpendicular
to this ground line, Q is perpendicular to Vi (§ 50, par. 5), and
its trace, ViQ, on the secondary F-plane is an edge view of Q

(§ 61). To find VjQ : since Q is seen edgewise against Fi, ViQ

will pass through the projection of any point in Q.
Now VQ, being the intersection of F and Q, lies in both V
and Q. Assume any point c" in VQ then the point c is in Q ;

and also in F, whence c' is in GL. Using the projections c*

and C, find the secondary projection Ci". The required trace.
 ;

50 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VII, § 70

ViQ, passes through Ci" and the point in which HQ intersects

the ground line GiLi.

71. Projections of Solids. A secondary projection of a solid

isobtained by extendiag the method used for points and lines.
As an illustration, the irregular triangular pyramid of Fig. 32
is shown on a secondary vertical plane. In
in Fig. 93 projected
this illustration no attempt was made to simplify the projec-
tion of the solid, nor is it always possible to do so. A case in
which a simplification is effected, however, is shown in Fig. 94

Fig. 93. Fig. 94.

here the projection on the secondary F-plane gives information

about the size, shape, and position of the prism which is not
directly obtainable from the original F-projection.
72. The Two V-Projections Compared. The relation between
two F-proj actions of an object is the same, whichever be con-
sidered the original, and which the secondary, projection (§ 67).
Hence, in Fig. 94, instead of constructing the Frprojection
from the H- and F-projections, the F-projection might be con-
structed if the H- and Fj-projections are known. That is, if
an object is known to have a simple projection when seen from
 :

VII, § 73] SECONDARY PLANES OF PROJECTION 51

a certain point of view, this fact may be used to construct the

projections of the object. The student should examine Eig. 94,
assuming be drawn as the answer to the following problem
it to
Draw the H- and F-projections of a square right prism.
The edges of the base are f" length of prism 1\". The lateral
;

edges are parallel to H, 45° with V, backward to the left the ;

front end of the highest lateral edge is located at point

1 (1*, 1°). The front lateral face of the prism makes 60° with H.
[Hint. After point 1 is located in all three projections, the
views are completed in this order : Frprojection, if-projection,
F-projection.J
The object shown in Fig. 95 consists of two circular conical

Fig. 95.

frustums placed base to-base. Note the relation between the two
Fprojections, and especially the position of the ground line.

73. Oblique Secondary Planes. Secondary planes of projec-

tion perpendicular to F and oblique to H will not be considered
in detail, as their use in practical work is very limited.
(See § 65.) The treatment being entirely analogous to the
plane perpendicular to H, the student should have no difficulty
in using such a plane of projection should occasion arise.
 CHAPTER VIII

REVOLUTION OF A POINT — TRUE LENGTH OF A

STRAIGHT LINE — APPLICATIONS

74. Revolution of a Point about a Straight Line. A point may

be revolved about any straight line as an axis through a com-
plete revolution or through a portion of a revolution. In the
case of a complete revolution, the path of the revolving point
will be the circumference of a circle which lies in a plane pass-
ing through the point and perpendicular to the axis and whose

Fig. 96.

center lies on the axis. In the case of a portion of a revolu-

tion, the path will be an arc of such a circle.
We shall proceed to discuss certain simple cases in which the
axis of revolution lies in a particular position.
75. Axes of Revolution Perpendicular to H or V. In certain
positions of the axis of revolution, the circular path of the
revolving point will have simple projections on either // or V,
or both.
Let a, Fig. 96, be revolved about an axis perpendicular to
52
VIII, § 76] REVOLUTION OF A POINT 53

H. The circle in which a revolves will be parallel to H, and

will project oii H in its true shape and size, while the F-pro-

jection will be a straight line parallel to the ground line.

Similarly (Fig. 97), if the point is revolved about an axis per-

,v l I \o l .y

l\ I
I
/
I ' '
I

I I

I'l

FlG. 97.

pendicular to V, the circular path projects on F as a circle,

and on ^as a straight line parallel to QL.

76. Revolution of a Point about an Axis Lying in a Given Plane
(Fig. 98). Let us consider a point a, which is to be revolved

Fig. 98.

about an axis X, lying in a plane Q. The circular path

of the revolving point will project on Q as a straight line, be,
perpendicular to the axis X. It follows that if the point a
be revolved iuto the plane Q, its revolved position, 6 or c,
will be at a distance he or ce from the axis X, equal to the
true distance ae, of the point from the axis.'
54 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VIII, § 77

77. The True Length of a Line. Let ab be a straight line of

definite length. If placed parallel to any plane of projection,
as Q, Eig. 99, the projection of Wb" will evidently be equal in
length to ab. If, however, the line is placed at any angle with
Q, the length of the projection will be shorter than that of the
liae. (See the line cd, Fig. 39.) But by revolution about a

Tig. 99.

suitable axis, a line can always be brought into such a position

that the true length will appear.

78. First Method for Finding True Length. The projection

of a line is equal to its true length when the line is parallel tO
the plane of projection (§ 77). The true length of any straight
line may therefore be found by revolving the line until it is
parallel to either H or V.
Problem 3. To find the true length of a straight line.
EiEST Method. By revolving about an axis perpendicular
to H or V.
Analysis. Through either end of the line assume an axis
perpendicular to Hand (of necessity) parallel to V. Revolve
the given line about this axis until the line is parallel to V.
Then the F-projection of the line in its revolved position will
show the true length of the line.
Or, assume the axis perpendicular to V and hence parallel
to H, and revolve the given line until parallel to H.
Construction (Fig. 100). Let a6 (a^fe*, a'h") be the given
line. Assume an axis of revolution perpendicular to H to
pass through the point a. Revolve the line about this axis
until the ff-projection takes the position al'd', parallel to OL,
 VIII, § 79] TRUE LENGTH OF A LINE 55

In this revolution, the angle which the line makes with the
axis does not change. Consequently, the angle which the
line makes with H, and therefore the length of the Zf-projection,
remain constant. The point 6 revolves in the circular arc
J" (J*, J"), lying in a plane parallel to H (§ 75), and is found at
the point c (c', c"). The line in the position ac (a*c*, Wc'°) is
parallel to V, and Wc" shows the true length.

Fig. 100. Fig. 101.

In a second example. Fig. 101, the axis of revolution is

'
taken through the point 6 and perpendicular to V. The true
length appears after the line has been revolved parallel to H.

79. The Angles Which a Line Makes with the Coordinate Planes.
A line in the position ac {a''&, WC), Fig.
100, which is parallel to
V, shows in the F-projection the angle, a, which the line itself
makes with H. The line ac is the revolved position of the line
ah. In the preceding construction we saw that during the revo-
lution the angle which the line made with H
did not change.
Hence a is the angle which the given line ah makes with H.
That is, in addition to finding the true length of the line a6 in
Fig. 100, we have incidentally found the angle which this line
makes with H.
Similarly, in Fig. 101, we found, as an incidental part of the
construction, the angle j3 which the line ah makes with V.
56 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VIII, § 80

80. Second Method for Finding True Length. The true length
of a straight line may also be found by revolving the line about
one of its own projections as an axis, until the line lies in a
coordinate plane.
Problem 3 (bis). To find the true length of a straight line.
Second Method. By revolution about one of the projec-
tions of the line.

Fig. 102.

Let ab be the given line, projected on

Analysis (Fig. 102).
any plane Q Revolve the plane ab^a" about a«6« as
at a'ft'.

axis into Q. Then a falls at a„ where a^a^ equals aa^, and is

perpendicular to a^b" (§ 76) b falls at &„ with bfi" equal to
;

bb' and perpendicular to a'6' hence a,,6, equals ab, and shows
;

the true length of the line.

Construction. The projection a'ft*, Eig. 103, corresponds to

a^b", Fig. 102, and
taken as the axis of revolution. Since a'
is

is the projection of the point a in space, the distance, aa', of

point a from the axis is equal to the distance of the point a

from H, which shows in the F-projection as the distance from a"

to OL. Hence to find the revolved position a^, make o*a, per-
pendicular to a^ft*, and the distance a''a, equal to a"e. Simi-
larly, 6*6, is perpendicular to a'ft', and is equal to 6"/. Then
afi^ shows the true length of the line ab.
In Fig. 104 the F-projection is taken as the axis, and the
line is revolved into V. The distances a"a, and 6"6, are the
distances of the points a and 6, respectively, from F, and are
equal to the distances from a* and 6* to the ground line. Note
that not only the distances, but the directions, of the points a
and b from the F-plane must be considered. The ^-projection
VIII, § 82] TRUE LENGTH OF A LINE 57

shows that a and h, in space, are on opposite sides of V, hence

their revolved positions, a, and &,,must fall on opposite sides
of the axis, a'h", which lies in V.

Fig. 103. Fig. 104.

81. Traces of the Line. Let the line ab, Kg. 102, be pro-
duced to intersect its projection a«6« in the point s; then in
revolving about a«6« as axis, the point s will remain fixed, and
ajb^ produced must pass through s. But since a«6« lies in Q,
the point s must be the point in which ah pierces Q, or the
Q-traee of ab. In the projection. Fig. 103, let a,b, be produced
to meet a^fe' produced at s then s must be the if-trace of the
;

line ab, and should be the same point that is found by project-
ing from the intersection of a'°h'° produced and QL, as in
Problem 1 (§ 37).

82. Angles with the Coordinate Planes. The angle a. Fig.

102, between ah and a«6« is the angle which the line ah makes
with the plane Q, and this angle is not changed by the revo-
lution into Q. Hence, in Fig. 103, the angle a, between a^fi*
and afi^, is the true angle which the line ah makes with H.
In Fig. 104, since the line ah was revolved into V, we have
found the F-trace, t, where afi^ intersects a^b"- The angle, j8,
between these lines is the angle which the line ah makes with V.
58 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VIII, § 83

83. Converse Problems. In each of the preceding methods

for finding the true length of a line it is necessary to find the
angle between the line and one of the coorduiate planes.
Conversely, it is easy to see that a Irae may be located, when
certaia angles are known, by reversing one of the preceding
constructions.

Problem 4. To find the projections of a line of definite length,

when its slope, the angle which it makes with one coordinate plane,
and the direction of its projection on that plane, are known.
In order to give the line a definite position in space, it will
be assumed, in addition to the above data, that one end of the
line is located at a given fixed poiut a.
It is evident geometrically that the position of the line in
space is now completely determined.
Analysis. If the angle which the liue makes with is H
given, reverse any construction of Problem 3 which gives the
angle with H. Proceed similarly if the angle with V is the
given angle.

Fig. 100 (repeated). Fig. 101 (repeated).

Construction. First Method

(Fig. 100). [Reverse of
First Method Prob., 3,Let the angle with
§ 78.] and H
the direction of the JT-proj action be given, Let the point a be
the fixed end of the line,
VIII, § 83] TRUE LENGTH OF A LINE 59

Place the line in the position ac (a'C, a'c*), parallel to V,

making a'c" equal to the true length of the line, at the given
angle with H, and sloping upward or downward from a as
given.
Take an axis perpendicular to H
through the fixed end, a,
and revolve the line imtil the ^f-projection takes the given
direction a'ft*. Find the corresponding projection Wb".
Second Method (Fig. 103). [Eeverse of Second Method,
Prob. 3, § 80.] As before, let the angle, n, with and the H

Fig. 103 (repeated). Fig. 104 (repeated).

direction of the ff-pr ejection be given, and let the point a be

the fixed end of the line. Through a.* draw a''s, indefinite in
length, and in the given direction. Draw a''a^ perpendicular
to and make the distance a''a, equal to o'e. Draw a^s in-
a''s,

definite in length and at the angle a with a'^s. In this case, the
line is supposed to slope downward from the point a. Make
afi, equal to the given true length of the line. Draw &,&' per-

pendicular to ah, locating &*. Project from 6* perpendicular

to GL, and make the distance fb' equal to &*&„ thus locating &".
The student should see if he can solve the problem when
the angle with yand direction of the F-projection are given,
by reversing the constructions of Figs. 101 and 104.
60 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [VIII, § 83

Problem 5. To find the projections of a line making given angles

with H and V.
In order to bring a definite solution it will be assumed that
the true length, slope, and location of one end of the line are
known. The general solution to the problem as stated above
consists of four series of parallel lines, corresponding to the
four possible slopes of a line (§ 31).
Analysis. Consider the problem solved, as in Fig. 105, and
let ah (al'b'', a'b') be the resulting line, with point a the fixed

-
J"
VIII, § 83] TRUE LENGTH OF A LINE 61

Eevolve this line about an axis through a perpendicular to H,

by drawing the projections, J"' and J", of the arc in which
point c revolves.
Place the line also in the position ad (a'^d'', a'd") parallel to
H, where a^d* (equals a'C) equals the true length of the line
and makes with GL the angle, /?, which the line makes with
V. Eevolve this line about an axis through a perpendicular to
V, by drawing the projections, K' and K'', of the arc in which
d revolves.
The point 6 (&*, 6"), which determines the projections of the
required line ab, is found at the intersection of the two paths
of revolution J and K. Note that this point is independently
determined in each projection hence as a check on the work
;

the projector 6"6'' should be perpendicular to GL.

 CHAPTER IX
SOME SIMPLE INTERSECTIONS — DEVELOPMENTS
84. Simple Intersections of Solids of Revolution. In generat-
ing the surface of a solid of revolution, each point of the gener-
ating line describes a circle which lies in a plane perpendicular
to the axis, and whose center lies in the axis (§ 74). If the
axis of the surface be placed perpendicular to H (or V), these
circles will project on fl" (F) in their true shape and size, and
on V (H) as horizontal straight lines which are the edge views
of the planes containing the circles (§ 75).
The intersection of a surface of revolution by a plane may
be found by drawing on the surface a sufficient number of
circles, obtained by passing auxiliary planes perpendicular to
the axis of the surface, and then finding the points in which
these circles are intersected by the given planes.

85. Visibility of the Intersection. In this and subsequent

parts of this book, whenever a solid is intersected by a plane,
no part of the solid will be considered as cut away or re-
moved unless so stated. In determining the visibility of the
line of intersection, the cutting plane will be considered trans-
parent and the solid opaque. The line of intersection will be
visualized as a line drawn on the surface of the solid. Hence,
the line of intersection, or any portion of it, will be visible in
any given projection when the line lies on a portion of the sur-
face which is visible in that projection and conversely.
;

The visibility of the line of intersection, then, depends

directly upon the visibility of the given solid (§ 24).

86. Examples. The only position of the cutting plane

which will be considered at this time is an edge view. Then
62
IX, § 86] INTERSECTIONS — DEVELOPMENTS 63

the plane is perpendicular to either H or V. In the folio-wing

examples, the axis of each surface is perpendicular to H, so
that the auxiliary circles (§ 84) all lie in planes which are
parallel to H. Note in each example the visibility of the
curve of intersection (§ 85).
Example 1 (Eig. 106). A cone of revolution cut by a plane
perpendicular to V. Since the whole convex: surface of the
cone is visible in plan, the entire curve is visible in plan.

Fig. 106. Fig. 107.

The is found by revolving the section

true size of the section
until parallel to V about
an axis parallel to VQ. The true
width at any point, as 2'8', equals the true distance 2-8 which
appears in the IT-projection.
Example 2 (Fig. 107). A cone of revolution cut by a plane
parallel to V. The curve is visible in elevation, siace it is
wholly on the front half of "the cone.

The true size of the section appears in the F-projection.

64 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [IX, § 86

Example 3. (Fig. 108). A sphere cut by a plane perpen-

dicular to V. Here the intersection, as seen in elevation, lies
partly on the upper half of the sphere, and partly; on the
lower. Hence, in the plan one part of the curve is visible, and
the other part invisible. The two points in which the curve
changes from visible to invisible are necessarily on the outline
of the sphere. Why ?
The true size of the section is a circle whose diameter
appears in the F-projection.

Fig. 108. PiQ. 109.

Example 4 (Eig. 109). Atorus (§ 26) cut hy a plane per-

pendicular to V. An auxiliary plane, such as M, cuts the gen-
erating circle in two points. Hence, in this plane two circles
lying in the surface of the torus can be drawn, one of diameter
ad, and the other of diameter 6c. Similarly, two circles can
be drawn in every plane perpendicular to the axis, except in
IX, §86] INTERSECTIONS — DEVELOPMENTS 65

those which pass through the highest and lowest points of the
generating circles.
The visibility of the curve in plan is determined in the same
way as for the sphere, Fig. 108.
The true size of the section is shown parallel to V, as in
Example 1.

Example 5 (Fig. 110). A hyperbolic spindle, cut by a plane

perpendicular In this case the surface that
to V. is cut is
wholly hidden in plan, hence the curve is invisible.
The true size of the section is shown parallel to V.

Fig. 110. Fig. 111.

Example 6 (Fig. 111). A torus, cut by two planes parallel

to V. The X section, wholly on the back of the surface, is
inyisible. The W section, entirely on the visible part of the
torus, is wholly visible.
The true size of each section appears at once.
r
66 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [IX, § 86

Example 7 (Eig. 112). A hyperbolic spindle, cut by two

planes parallel to V. Each plane cuts a section composed of

Fig. 112.

two parts. The visibility of the curves should be evident from

an inspection of the position of the cutting planes.
87. Developments. The development of a solid bounded by
plane faces consists of a series of polygons of the true sizes
and shapes of the various faces of the solid, so arranged, edge
to edge,' that the development may be folded up to reproduce
the surface of the solid. If a face of a solid is a triangle, the
true size of the face may be constructed from the true lengths
of its three sides. If the faceis a polygon of more than three

sides, the true size and shape cannot be determined from the
true lengths of the sides alone. Any plane polygon, however,
can be divided into triangles by drawing certain diagonals, and
the polygon can be constructed from these triangles. Hence
the development of any solid bounded by plane faces can be
obtained wholly by finding the true lengths of straight lines.
 :

IX, § 88] INTERSECTIONS — DEVELOPMENTS 67

88. Working Method for Finding the True Length of a Line.

In tlie solution of many problems the true length of a line is
found in order to be used as a radius for setting compasses or
dividers. The angle made with ff or F is not needed. Hence
it is sufiicient to construct two points whose distance apart is

equal to the true length of the line.

Let ab, Fig. 113, be any line, and let the true length of this
line be found by revolving it parallel to V, keeping the upper

Fig. 113. Fig. 114.

end of the line fixed (Prob. 3, Eirst Method, § 78), thus giving
Wc as the true length. Now the point c can be found by draw-
ing through 6" a horizontal line, intersecting the projector a^'a''

at e, and then laying off the distance ec directly with the

dividers equal to a''bK Hence the, following working rule
E.ULE. The true length of a straight line equals the hypothe-
nuse of a right triangle whose base equals the length of the H-pro-
jection of the line, and whose altitude is equal to the difference in
elevation between the two ends of the line.
If the lower end of the line is in the if-plane, 6" will lie in GL,
and the method becomes even simpler. Thus, the true length
of the line ab, Eig. 114, may be found by laying off on OL the
distance ec equal to a*6* ; then a'c is the desired true length.
68 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [IX, § 89

89. To Find the Development of a Solid with Plane Faces.

Let the given solid be the frustum of an irregular four-sided
pyramid, Fig. 115. Each face is a quadrilateral, which can be
divided into two triangles by means of one diagonal. Never-
theless it is easier to begin by finding the development of the
triangular faces of the complete pyramid. Assuming that the
true lengths of the various lines are found as needed, we proceed
with them as follows {B, Fig. 115). On any convenient line,
o

Fig. 115.

lay off the distance 0-1 with and 1 as centers, and radii 0-2
;

and 1-2 respectively, strike arcs intersecting in point 2. This

gives the development of the triangular face 0-1-2.
With and 2 as centers, radii 0-3 and 2-3 respectively,
locate point 3, thus obtaining the development of the face
0-2-3. In the same way obtain the faces 0-3-4 and 0-4-1.
The base, 1-2-3^, of the pyramid is divided into triangles
by the diagonal 1-3, and is plotted to join one of the edges
previously located, as 2-3. The result thus far obtained is the
development of the complete pyramid. To convert it into the
development of the frustum, proceed as follows :
IX, § 90] INTERSECTIONS — DEVELOPMENTS 69

On 0-1, 0-2, etc., of the development, measure the true

lengths of the lines 1-5, 2-6, 3-7, 4-8, and draw. 5-6-7-8-5.
Draw one diagonal, as 5-7, of the upper base, plot this base
by means of the two triangles thus formed, and join it prop-
erly to one of the previous lines of the development. The
development of the frustum is now complete.

90. To Construct the Projections of a Prism Whose Long Edges

Make Given Angles with H. and V (Fig. 116). Let it be required
to draw the projections of a prism whosfe long edges shall make
30° with ZTand 45° with V.
Place the prism first with its long edges parallel to fi'and
making the given angle, 46°, with V- Assuming that the neces-
sary sizes, slopes, and distances are given, we can construct
6

Fig. 116.

these projections by using a secondary ground line, as in § 72

{B, Fig. 116). Find, by Problem 5, § 83, the projections of a
ah making the given angles with
line and H V
{A, Fig. 116).
Now the long edges of the prism as placed in B, Fig. 116,
make the given angle with V. If the prism be revolved about
any axis perpendicular to V, the edges will continue to make
the same angle with F, while the projection of the prism on V
70 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [IX, § 90

will remain of the same shape and size. Let the prism be re-
volved untU the F-projections of the long edges are parallel to
ayb", as shown at C, Fig. 116.
In making this revolution, the actual axis need not be used.
It suffices to copy the F^projection obtained at B, making the
long edges of the prism parallel to the direction a'S" obtained
at A. But in this revolution, the ^-projection of the path of
each moving point will be a horizontal straight line, regardless

Fig. 116 (repeated).

of the position of the axis of revolution. Hence the £'-projec-

tion at G may be obtained by projecting vertically from the
F^projection, and horizontally from the if-projection at B.
As a check, the long edges of the projection thus obtained
should be parallel to the direction a*6* found at A.
The projections at G are the required projections.

91. Other Methods. The projections at B, Fig. 116, were

made by knowing the angle which the long edges of the prism
made with V, while the projections at G were made by know-
ing the inclination of the F^projection of the edges. These
two quantities might have been given directly, and projections
B and G constructed by Problem 4, § 83.
 CHAPTER X
LINES IN A PLANE — PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES

92. Intersecting and Parallel Lines. Two lines intersect

when they pass through a common point. Two lines are
parallel when they are everywhere equally distant. If two
straight lines lie in the same plane, they either intersect or are
parallel. This is not necessarily the case, however, with any
two lines ra space.

93. Parallel Lines in Space. If two lines in space are parallel,

their projections on any plane are parallel.
Let the two parallel lines A and B, Fig. 117, be projected
on the plane Q by planes perpendicular to Q. Since the two

Fig. 117. Fig. 118.

projecting planes will i& parallel, their intersections, A^ and

B", with the plane Q will be parallel.
In general, if lines A and B are parallel, it is definitely
shown by the simultaneous condition that A'^ is parallel to JB*,
and A" is parallel to B". Profile lines are an exception such ;

lines may be tested by means of their profile projections.

Thus, the prpfile lines ah and cd, Fig. 118, are parallel, since
their profile projections are. parallel..
71
72 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 94

94. Intersecting Lines in Space. If two lines in space intersect,

their corresponding projections intersect in the same projector.

Let A and B, Fig. 119, be two intersecting lines. Since
these lines intersect, there must be a point, c, common to each
of them. Since c is a point of the line A, the iZ-projection, c*,

Fig. 119.

must lie on A'' (§ 36). Moreover, since c is in the line B, c'

must lie on 5*. Hence c* is at the intersection of J[* and jB*.

F-projection of c, c", must lie at the inter-

Similarly, the
section of A" and B". But since c* and c° are two projections
of the same point, they must lie in the same projector.
If two lines have a common projection (Eig. 120), they lie in
the same plane, namely, the plane whose edge view coiacideB

FiQ. 120.

with the common projection. Such lines are either intersect-

ing, as in the figure, or parallel (§ 92).
X, § 95] LINES IN A PLANE 73

95. Test for Intersecting Lines. Conversely, if the correspond-

ing projections of two lines intersect in the same projector, the
lines in space intersect. The only exception occurs when one of

Fig. 121.

the lines is a profile line ; thus, the line E, Eig. 121, does not
intersect the profile line ah, since the point c, in which Epierces
the profile plane containing ah, does not lie on the line ab.

Fig. 122.

If the point of intersection outside the limits of the draw-

is

ing (Eig. 122), the test In this case take any two points,
fails.

d and e, on A, and any two,/ and g, on B. Then if A and B

intersect, df and eg (or else-dgr and ef) will intersect.
74 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 96

96. A Line in a Plane. If a line lies in a plane, the traces

of the line lie in the corresponding traces of the plane.
Let a line A lie in a plane Q (Figs. 123 and 124). Then if

A intersects H, it can evidently do so only in some point of

Fig. 123. Fig. 124.

the line in which Q intersects H ; and the intersections with

H are the respective traces of the line and plane. Similarly
for any other plane of projection.

97. To Locate a Line in a Plane. A line will lie in a given

plane if the line passes through two points which lie in the
plane. Thus, in Eig. 123, let us assume on VQ.
s* on HQ, and t"

These two points are the traces of some line lying in the plane Q
(§ 96). The projections A'' and A" may then be found by Prob-
lem 2, § 37.
Other methods of determining a line so that it shall lie in
a given plane will be given later. (See §§ 100, 133.)
98. A Plane Containing a Given Line, The proposition of
§ 96 enables us to pass a plane through a given line. Thus, in
Eig. 123, let A(A'', A") be a given line, whose traces are the
points s and t. A plane Q may be passed through A by
drawing HQ in any direction through s*, and then drawing
VQ through f and the point in which HQ intersects the
ground line. Conversely, VQ may be drawn first, in any direc-
tion through f, and then HQ may be drawn through s* and
the intersection of VQ with the ground line.
An indefinite number of planes may be passed through a
X, § 99] LINES IN A PLANE 76

given line. In particular (Eig. 125), we may draw a plane X,

perpendicular to H, a plane T perpendicular to V, and a plane
S parallel to the ground line. (See also § 102.)

Fig 125.

99. Principal Lines of a Plane. Eor every plane there are

two systems of lines which are of importance, and are called
the principal lines of the plane. One of these systems is

parallel to H, the other parallel to V.

The horizontal principal lines are J7-parallels, cut from the
given plane by a series of planes parallel to JI. The lines are
therefore parallel to the H-ti&ce of
the plane ; their If-projections are
parallel to this trace, while their
F-p rejections are parallel to the
ground line. Visualize this state-
ment, aided, if necessary, by Eig. 126.

The vertical principal lines are cut

from the plane by a series of planes
Fig. 12(j.
parallel to V. They are F-parallels,
parallel to the F-trace of the plane. Their F-projections are
parallel to this trace, their If-projections are parallel to the
ground line.
These two groups of lines are, in general, different. They
reduce to the same set when, and only when, the given plane
is parallel to the ground line.
76 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 100

100. To Project the Principal Lines of a General Plane. To

draw the projections of a horizontal principal line of a general
plane, Q, Eig. 127, assume the F-trace of this line as any point.

t",in VQ, and iind <* on GL. Then, by § 99, A'' passes through
«* and is parallel to HQ, while A" passes through P and is
parallel to GL.
Similarly, a vertical principal line, B, may be drawn by first
assuming its H-tiace, s, on HQ.
To Project the Principal Lines of a Plane Parallel to
101.
the Ground Line. To draw a principal line of a plane when
the plane is parallel to the ground line, as Q, Fig. 128, find the

VQ

^o/

\J< A^

V.^Sk. HQ
X
Fig. 128. Fig. 129.

profile trace, PQ, of the given plane. On PQ assume any

point, u", as the profile trace of the required principal line.
Both projections of this line are parallel to the ground line.
X, § 103] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 77

102. A Plane Containing a Line Parallel to H

or V. Any
plane, as Q or B, Eig. 129, which is passed through an H-
parallel will have its ^-trace parallel to the ^-projection of
the line. (Converse of § 100.)
Similarly, any plane passed through a F-parallel will have
its F-trace parallel to the F-projection of the line.

Any plane, as Q, Fig. 128, which contains a line parallel to

both H
and F will have both its H- and F-traces parallel to
the ground line. (Converse of § 101.)

103. Parallel Planes. If two planes are parallel, their corre-

sponding traces are parallel.
Let Q and R be the given planes. Let Q intersect H in
HQ, and R intersect H in HR. The figure is left for the
student to draw. Now when two parallel planes, Q and R,
are intersected by a third plane, H, the lines of intersection
must be parallel. Hence HQ is parallel to HB. Similarly
for any other plane of projection.
78 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 104

104. A Line Parallel to a Plane. A straight line is parallel

to a plane if it is parallel to some line lying in the plane.
Thus the line A, Fig. 131, is parallel to the plane Q, siace it is

parallel to the line B which lies in Q. If the line B were not

Fig. 131.

drawn, however, it would be difiicult to recognize the parallel-

ism. Thus, in Fig. 132, both the lines A and B are parallel to
the plane B, but this fact can hardly be seen by inspection.

Fig. 132. Fig. 133.

The fact that a line is parallel to a plane can be recognized at

once only when the line is parallel to one of the systems of
principal lines of the plane. In Fig. 133, it is evident that
both liaes C and D are parallel to the plane S.
 ; ;

X, § 106] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 79

105. A
Plane Parallel to a Line. Conversely, a plane is par-
allel to a straight line if the plane contains a line which is
parallel to the given line. Thus, in Fig. 131, since the lines A
and B
are parallel, the plane Q, or any other plane passed
through B, is parallel to the line A. The only exception is
the plane which contains both A and JS.

106. A Plane Determined by Lines or Points. One plane, and

one only, may be found which contains
(a) two intersecting lines
(6) two parallel lines ;

(c) a liue and a point not on the line

(d) three points not in the same straight line.

Problem 6. To find the plane which contains two given intersecting

or parallel lines.
80 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 106

A plane -whicli contains two given parallel lines is shown in

Fig. 135. The construction is entirely similar to that just given.

Fig. 135.

In Fig. 136 the fi'-trace of the given line B is too far removed
to be used in the construction. The plane Q, containing and A

Fig. 136. FiQ. 137.

B, is located by first drawing VQ through the F-traces of the

given lines ; then HQ is drawn through the fi-trace of A and
X, § 106] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 81

the point in which VQ intersects the ground line. This con-

struction gives no check on the work, but may be used in case
of necessity. Other constructions which may be employed
when traces of the given lines are not accessible will be given
in § 108. We shall consider at present only those cases in
which one or both of the given lines are parallel to // or to V.
Special Case I. Let us suppose that one of the given lines
is parallel to H
or V. Let A, Fig. 137, be parallel to V. Then
VQ is parallel to A" (§ 102), and passes through the F-trace of
the line B. The trace HQ is determined, as in the general
case, by the Zf-traces of the given lines. In Eig. 137, the
point in which HQ and VQ intersect on GL is not available,
but it is not necessary.
Special Case II. If one of the given lines, as A, Eig. 138,
is parallel to both ^
and V, that is, parallel to the ground line,

Ha
82 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 106

CoEOLLAEY I. To find the plane which contains a given line

and a given point.
Analysis. Through the giyen point, draw an auxiliary line
parallel to the given line, thus reducing the problem to one of
two parallel lines. Or, assume any point on the given line,
and draw an auxiliary line through this point and the given
point, thus reducing the problem to two intersecting lines. The
first method is the one usually adopted.

Construction (Fig. 140). A is the given line, c the given

point. The auxiliary line B is drawn through c parallel to A

Fig. 140.

(§ 93), and the required plane Q is passed through the lines

A and B.
In Fig. 141 the line A is parallel to V; hence the direction
of VQ is known to be parallel to A' (§ 102). But as neither
A nor B has a F-trace, a point on VQ is determined by noting
where HQ
intersects GL.
CoKOLi^KY II. To find the plane which contains three giV6n
points not in the same straight line.
Analysis. Connect any two points by a straight line, and
through the third point draw a second line parallel to .the first,
 ;;

X, § 107] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 83

thus reducing the problem to two parallel lines. Or, draw

liaes connecting any point with each of the other two, thus
reduciag the problem to one of two intersecting lines.

Fig. 141. Fig. 142.

No figure for the general case is thought necessary. It is

interesting to note that this device may be used for passing a
plane through a profile liae and a point. Thus (Eig. 142), let
a& be the given liae and c the given point. Draw the lines ac
(aJ'd', av), and be (6*c*, b'C), and pass the required plane Q
through these This avoids the necessity of finding the
lines.
traces of the profile line ab, although its traces, if found, should
lie on HQ and VQ respectively (§ 96).

107. A Plane Parallel to Lines or to Another Plane. A plane

which is parallel to given lines or to another plane is deter-
mined by the fact that a plane containing one of two parallel
lines is parallel to the other line (§ 105).
One plane, and one only, may be found which
(a) contains a given line and is parallel to a second given

line that is not parallel to the first line

(6) contains a given point and is parallel to each of two given
lines that are not parallel to each other
(c) contains a given point and is parallel to a given plane.
84 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 107

Problem 7. To find the plane which contains a given line and is

parallel to a second given line.

Analysis. Through any point on the first given line draw an

auxiliary line parallel to the second given line. The required
plane is determined by the first line and the auxiliary line.

Fig. 143.

Construction (Fig. 143). Let it be required to pass the plane

through the line A. Assume any point c on ^through c draw
;

the line D parallel to B. Pass the required plane Q through

the lines A and D (Prob. 6, § 106).

Fia. .ii.
 :

X, § 107] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 85

Special Case I. Suppos;e the second line is parallel to Ji

or V; then no auxiliary line is needed. Thus, in Fig. 144, let
us find the plane which contains the line A and is parallel to
B. The JT-trace of any plane which is parallel to B must be
parallel to £* (§ 104). Hence, find the traces of A. Draw
HQ through s^ parallel to B'' ;draw VQ through t^ and the
point in which HQ intersects GL.
Special Case II. Suppose that either the first or the second
given line isa profile line. The general solution will apply to
this case ;
but if the problem be solved in this manner, a profile
projection will be necessary. A simple construction, by which
the use of a profile projection may
be avoided, is as follows
Let ab and C, Fig. 146, be the given lines\ Through one
point of the profile line, as a, draw an auxiliary line D parallel
to the line 0; through the other point, b, of ab, draw a second

Fig. 145.

auxiliary line E parallel to C. Pass the plane Q through the

two parallel lines D and U. Then if the required plane is to
contain ab and be parallel to C, plane Q is the required plane.
If, however, the required plane is to contain C and be parallel

to ab, the plane B, passed through C parallel to plane Q (§ 103),

is the required plane.
86 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 107

Problem 8. To find the plane which contains a given point and is

parallel to each of two given lines.

Analysis. Through the given point draw two auxiliary lines,

one parallel to one given line, the other parallel to the other
given line. The required plane is determined by the two aux-
iliary lines.

Fig. 146.

Construction (Fig. 146). Let c be the given point, A and B

the given lines. Through c draw the auxiliary lines, D parallel
to A, and E parallel to B. Pass the required plane Q through
the lines D and E (Prob. 6, § 106).
The special cases of this problem are too similar to those of
Problem 7 to require a detailed discussion.
Problem 9. To find the plane which contains a given point and is

parallel to a given plane.

Analysis. Through the given point, pass a line parallel to

the given plane. Through this line, pass the required plane
parallel to the given plane.
Construction (Eig. 147). Let Q be the given plane and a the
given point. A line may be drawn through a and parallel to
Q by drawing it parallel to either the horizontal or vertical
principal lines of Q (§ 104). The line M, drawn through a, is
parallel to the vertical principal lines of Q ; through M pass
the required plane T, parallel to Q (§ 103).
X, § 107] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 87

In Fig. 148, the required plane T is found by means of the

auxiliary line N, which is parallel to the horizontal principal
lines of the given plane Q.

Fig. 147. Fig. 148.

Special CASB-;^(Eig. 149). Let the given plane Q be parallel

to the ground line. Then the auxiliary liae M, drawn through
a and parallel to the principal lines of Q, is parallel to GL
(§ 101) and has no traces on H and V. Pass the auxiliary

HT
M^
88 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 108

108. Use of Auxiliary Lines in Finding the Traces of Planes.

A straight line is determined :

1. When two of its points are known ;.

2. When one of its points and its direction (such as parallel

or perpendicular to another line) are known.
For accuracy of construction, the second method of deter-
mining a line is often better than the first. In any event, how-
ever, a line is not determined until at least one point is known.
The traces of the required planes in the preceding problems,
being straight liues, have necessarily been located by one of
these methods. It occasionally happens, however, that neces-
sary points for locating these traces fall far outside any rea-
sonable limits for the size of the figure, and recourse must be
had which will locate points within reach.
to auxiliary lines
Example Let it be required to find the plane
1 (Fig. 160).
which contaias the lines A and B, so situated that only one

Fig. 150.

point,$2, on HQ, and one point, t^, on VQ, can be found.

Assume any point, e, in the given line A through this point ;

draw the line D, parallel to the given line B. Pass the plane
Q through the parallel lines B and D. This plane must
necessarily contain the line A, since A intersects both B and
D, and is the required plane.
In general, assume any point on one of the given lines.
X, § 108] PARALLEL LINES AND PLANES 89

Through this point draw an auxiliary line parallel to the

second given line ; the auxiliary line will lie in the plane of
the given lines. Judgment must be used in selecting the line
to which the auxiliary line should be made parallel, in order that
this latter line may be of service in obtaining additional points.
Example 2. Another method of obtaining a line lying in
the plane of two given lines shown
is in Eig. 151. Let A and
B be the given lines. Assume any point, e, in A, and any
point, /, in B. Then the line D, passing through e and /, will
lie in the plane of the lines A and B, and the traces of D will
lie in the traces of the required plane Q. As before, judg-
ment must be used in selecting the points e and /.

Fig. 151. Fig. 152.

Example 3. When the given data are sufficient to determine

one trace of the plane, a very useful auxiliary line is one of
the principal lines (§ 99) of the plane itself. Let A and B,
Eig. 152, be sufficient to locate VQ but not HQ. Assume a
point in one of the given lines, as point c in line A. Through
cdraw a vertical principal line of Q, by making M" parallel to
VQ, and iW" * parallel to OL. Then the line M
lies in Q, and

its fl"-trace, Sj, is a point in HQ.

If HQweie the known trace, a horizontal principal line of
the plane could be similarly drawn to locate a point in YQ-
90 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [X, § 108

Example Another metliod of procedure, when one trace

4.

of the plane known, is shown in Fig. 153. Let VQ be the

is

known trace. Assume any point, f, in VQ this point lies in

;

V, and t''is in GL. Through the point t, draw the auxiliary

line D parallel to one of the given lines, as A. Then the line
D lies in the plane Q, and its ZT-trace, s*, is a point in HQ.

Fig. 153. Fig. 154.

In general, the auxiliary line- D may be drawn parallel to

either of the given lines A or B; but in this case D should
obviously be drawn parallel to A in order to obtain a result
within the limits of the figure.
Example 5. Let the lines A
and B, Fig. 154, be sufficient
to locate HQ but not VQ. A third method of obtaining an
auxiliary line is to assume any point, as s, on HQ, and any

point, as on either of the given lines A or B. Then the line

e,

D, joining s and e, lies in the plane Q, and its F-trace, f, is a

point in VQ-
In some situations, in order to get a sufficient number of
points, it may be necessary to employ more than one auxiliary
line. This would have been the case in Figs. 152, 153, and
154, if in any one of these figures the intersection of HQ and
VQ with the ground line had not been available.
 CHAPTER XI
PERPENDICULAR LINES AND PLANES

109. Perpendicular Lines. If two straight lines are perpen-

dicular to each other, the fact is from
not, in general, apparent
the projections of the lines.For example, consider the square
prism represented in Fig. 94. The edges of this solid form

Fig. 94 (repeated).

three series of mutually perpendicular lines ; but all these

edges are oblique to V, and in the F-projection no right angles
appear.
In the H- and secondary F-projections, however, the pro-
This shows that, under cer-
jected edges are af right angles.
tain conditions, it is possible to recognize perpendicular lines
from their projections.
91
92 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XI, § 110

110. Perpendicular Lines Whose Projections Are Perpendicular.

If two lines in space are mutually perpendicular, and are pro-
jected on any plane of projection parallel to one of the lines, the
two projections will he perpendicular to each other.
There is The plane of projec-
one and only one exception.
tionmust not be perpendicular to the second line for in this ;

case the line would project as a point, and a point cannot be

said to be perpendicular to a line.
Let the line A, Tig. 155, be parallel to H. Let Q be a plane
perpendicular to A and consequently perpendicular to H. In
this position of the line and plane, it is evident that A'' and
HQ are perpendicular to each other. Now let B be any line
drawn in the plane Q. Since A is perpendicular to Q, the
lines A and B must be mutually perpendicular. Also, since

i\
XI, § 113] PERPENDICULAR LINES AND PLANES 93

H; hence ^* is perpendicular to 5*, by § 110. Moreover JB* is

parallel to HQ. Hence A'' is perpendicular to HQ. Similarly
for any other plane of projection.

112. Test for Perpendicularity of a Line and a Plane. Con-

versely, if the horizontal and vertical projections of a line are
perpendicular to the corresponding traces of a plane, the line and

plane are mutually perpendicular.

The only exception occurs when the plane is parallel to the
ground line, for the projections of any profile line on and H V
are perpendicular to the H- and
F-traces of such a plane. Such
cases may
be tested by the use
of the profile projection. Thus, in
Fig. 167, the line ah is found to
be perpendicular to the plane Q.
113. Perpendicular Planes. If
two planes are mutually perpen-
dicular, the fact is not, in general,
evident from the traces of the
planes. Thus, in Fig. 158, the
line A perpendicular to the plane Q. Hence any plane, as
is

B or S, passed through A, is perpendicular to Q; but this

relation cannot be seen directly from the traces of the planes.
 :

94 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XI, § H3

Since HT coincides with A'', and ^* is perpendicular to HQ,

it follows that HT is perpendicular to HQ. Hence we have
the proposition
If two planes are mutually perpendicular, and one of them is
perpendicular to a coordinate plane, the traces of the two given

planes on that coordinate plane are perpendicular.

114. Lines of Maximum Inclination to H and V. Let Q be

any plane oblique to H. Those of its lines which are perpen-
dicular to HQ have the peculiarity that they make with a H
greater (acute) angle than any other lines in the plane. For
this reason they are called the lines
li of maximum inclination to H of the
plane Q. Let M, Tig. 160, be one
Y\^
M
I

I \^*^ of these lines. Since is perpen-

j
\t\^ dieular to HQ, it follows that M'
>J \ \^ must also be perpendicular to HQ.
>y^^ ^ / A plane is determined when one
N^ I
/ of its lines M ( JIf *, M") of maximum

/(^ inclination to H is given. Eor sup-

"y pose that s and t. Fig. 160, are the

Pjj, jgQ
traces of this line. Then the
fi'-trace, HQ, of the required plane
passes through s and is perpendicular to ilf*, while the F-trace,
VQ, is determined by t and the point in which HQ cuts the
ground line.
A similar analysis applies to lines of maximum inclination
to V.

115. Planes Perpendicular to a Given Line or Plane. One

plane, and one only, may be found which contains a given point
and is perpendicular to a given straight line. The point may
be on the liae, or at any distance from it.

One plane, and one only, may be found which contains a

given straight line and is perpendicular to a given plane. An
exception occurs when the line is itself perpendicular to the
given plane, in which case an infinite number of planes may be
found.
 -

Xr, § 115] PERPENDICULAR LINES AND PLANES 95

Problem 10. To find the plane which contains a given point and
is perpendicular to a given line.

Analysis. Through the given point draw an auxiliary line

which shall be perpendicular to (but does not necessarily inter-
sect) the given line. Through this line pass the required plane
perpendicular to the given line.

Let c be the given point and A the

Construction (Fig. 161).
given Through c draw the auxiliary line M, making Jf*
line.

perpendicular to A!' and M' parallel to OL. Then the line M

is parallel to H, and consequently perpendicular to ^ (§ 110).

Eind the F-trace, t, of M. Through t draw VQ perpendicular

bT—
Ha
96 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XI, § 115

Problem 11. To find the plane which contains a given line and is

perpendicular to a given plane.

Analysis. Through any point of the given line draw an

auxiliary line perpendicular to the given plane. Any plane
containing this line will be perpendicular to the given plane
(§ 113). Hence the required plane is the plane determined
by the given and auxiliary lines.
Construction (Pig. 163). Let A be the given line and Q the
given plane. Assume any point c on the line A, and through

Fio. 163. Fia. 164.

c draw the auxiliary line B perpendicular to Q (§ 112). Find

the plane T, containing the lines A and B (Prob. 6, § 106);
this is the required plane.
Special Case I. If the given line is a profile line, the gen-
eral method applies ; but the use of a profile projection may be
avoided as follows. Let be the given line, and Q
ah, Fig. 164,
the given plane. From each end of the given line draw the
respective auxiliary lines D
and E, each perpendicular to Q.
Pass the required plane T through the parallel lines and E D
(compare Fig. 145).
Special Case II (Fig. 165). Let the given plane, Q, be
parallel to the ground line, and let A be the given line. As in
XI, § 115] PERPENDICULAR LINES AND PLANES 97

the general case, assume any point c in the line A, and draw
the line B
perpendicular to Q. Then the required plane, T,
is the plane determined by the lines A and B. To find the
traces of T we need the traces of these two lines. The traces
of A are readily obtained (Prob. 1, § 37). To find the traces

a.
 DEPARTMENT
MACHINE VESTGN
SIBLEY SCHOOL
CORNELL UNI VctidlTY
-^^ -
CHAPTER 'IW
INTERSECTION OF PLANES AND OF LINES AND PLANES
— APPLICATIONS
116. Intersecting Planes. Let two planes Q (-ffQ, FQ) and
B, {H.R, VB) intersect in a line A. The figure will be left for
the student to draw. One point of the intersection will be
determined if we find where a line in one plane intersects a
line in the other. A second point may be similarly found by
the intersection of a second pair of lines. EYidently any such
pair of lines cannot be chosen at random, for in that case they
probably would not intersect. The ^-traces of the two planes,
however, as they are both in H, will in general intersect.
Likewise the two F-traces will in general intersect. But
the intersection of the fi'-traces will be the S"-trace of the
required line A (§ 96), and the intersection of the F-traces
will be the F-trace of A. The projections of the line A may
then be determined (Prob. 2, § 37).

117. A Point in the Intersection of Two Planes. .The general

method of obtaining a point in the line of intersection of two
planes is as follows Let two planes Q and R, as before, inter-
:

sect in a line A, and let X

be any plane not parallel to A.
Then Xwill intersect Q in a line xq, and will intersect i? in a
line xr. Since these lines are in the same plane, X, and can-
not be parallel (why ?), they intersect in a point, xqr, which
lies in all three planes, X, Q, and 22. Hence xqr is a point in
the line of intersection. A, of Q and R.
118. The Line of Intersection of Two Planes. The line of
intersection of two planes becomes known: (1) when two
points of the line are known ; (2) when one point and the
direction of the line are known. (Compare § 108.)

Problem 12. To find the line of intersection of two planes.

Analysis. The traces of the required line of intersection
lie at the intersection of the corresponding traces of the given
98
 ;

XII, § 118] INTERSECTION OF PLANES 99

planes (§ 116). The l-ine, may now be determined from its

traces (Prob. 2, § 37).

Construction, General Case (Fig. 166). Let Q and \B be the
given planes. The construction should be evident from the
analysis.

Fig. 166. FiQ. 167.

A second example, with planes differently situated, is given

in Fig. 167.
The general case may fail because of (a) parallel lines
(6) intersections inaccessible points s and t coiacident.
;
(c)

Special Case I. Suppose that one pair of traces is parallel

(Fig. 168). Let Q and B be the given planes, with HQ and HR
parallel. The intersection of VQ
and VR gives the F-trace, t, of the
required line of iutersection A.
Consider the planes Q, R, and H.
Siace the intersections of if with
Q and R
are parallel, must beH
parallel to the line of iatersection,
A, of these planes. Hence J.*
Fig. 168.
passes through <* and parallel to
HQ and HR, while A" passes through P and is parallel to OL.
The line of iatersection is thus seen to be a horizontal priucipal
line (§ 99) of each of the given planes.
If the F'-traces Of the given planes were parallel, while the
H-traces intersected, the resulting line of intersection would
be parallel to V, a vertical principal line of each of the given
planes.
100 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XII, § 118

If both the H- and F-traces of the given planes are respec-

tively parallel, the planes are parallel (§ 103), except in the
case inwhich each plane is parallel to the ground line.
Special Case II. Suppose that both planes are parallel to
the ground line (Fig. 169). Let Q and R be the given planes.
One point of the line of intersec-
.
I tion may be obtained by finding
its profile trace on any profile
plane of projection. Let P {HP,
VP) be any assumed profile
plane. Eiad the profile traces
PQ and PR of the given planes
(§ 60). Their intersection gives
W, the profile trace of the re-
quired liae of intersection A.
From 71" obtain m* and m", one
point in the line A. A second
point is not necessary, since this
linemust be parallel to both and H V (Case I), that is, parallel
to theground line.
Special Case III. One plane is parallel to H or F, the
other is oblique (Eig. 170). Let Q and R be the given planes,
XII, § 118] INTERSECTION OF PLANES 101

This is an important 'ease, since, on account of the simplicity

of the intersection, planes parallel to H or V are often intro-
duced as auxiliaries when the general case fails.
Special Case IV. The traces are not parallel, but one or
both pairs fail to intersect within the limits of the drawing.
Let Q and B, Fig. 171, be the given planes. The intersection
of the F-traces of these planes gives the point t, as in the
general case. Since HQ and HR do not intersect within
reach, pass the auxiliary plane, X, parallel to H. Planes X
and Q intersect in the line M (Case III) ;
planes X and B,
intersect in the line N; the lines ilf and N intersect in the
point c, which is a point in the intersection of the planes Q
and R {% 117). The points t and c determine the required line
of intersection A.
In Fig. 172, neither pair of traces intersect within the limits
of the figure. Two auxiliary planes, X
and Y, are used, each
of which locates a point on the line of intersection A. The
auxiliary planes may be parallel to either or V; in the H
figure they are taken parallel to V.

Special Case V. Both planes intersect the ground line at

the same point (Fig. 173). Let Q and R be the given planes.
The general case fails because the points s and t are coincident.
A point, c, in the required line of intersection. A, may be
determined by means of the auxiliary plane X parallel to V, as
in Fig. 172. An auxiliary plane parallel to H may be used if

preferred.
102 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XII, § 118

Special Case VI. One of the planes contains the ground

Let Q and
line (Fig. 174). B
be the given planes. passes B
through the ground ILae, and is determined by the quadrants
through which it passes
and its angle with H. As
in Special Case V, the
points s and t are cotiici-
dent on the ground line.
An additional point in. the
required line of intersec-

R is in quad-
tion may be found by the
rants 1^ 3, and
I
use of ah auxiliary profile
makes 60° with H plane of projection, as-
sumed anywhere except
through the coincident
points s and t. Eind the
Fig. 174.
profile traces, PQ and PR,
of the given planes (§ 60). These traces intersect in c",

which is the profile projection of a point in the required line

of intersection.

119. The Intersection of a Line and a Plane. Let a line A

(Eig. 175) intersect a plane Q. The point of intersection will

Fig. 175.

be determined if we find where A

intersects a line in plane Q.
This line cannot, however, be any line chosen at random in Q,
for such a line will probably not intersect A. Let a plane, X,
be passed through the line A. Then X
will intersect Q in a
line, T. This line F
is a line in the plane Q, which is inter-
XII, § 119] INTERSECTION OF PLANES 103

sected by A at the point c. Hence c is the required point in

which A intersects Q. The solution thus depends directly upon
the preceding problem.

Problem 13. To find the point in which a straight line intersects a

plane.

Analysis. Through the given line, pass any auxiliary plane.

Find the line of intersection of the auxiliary plane with the
given plane, and note the point in which this line intersects
the given line. This is the required point of intersection of
the given line and plane.
General Method. Construction (Fig. 176). Let A be the given
line, and Q the given plane. Through A pass any auxiliary

Fig. 176.

plane, as X (§ 98). Find the line of intersection, B, of X and

Q (Frob. 12, § 118). The line A intersects the line B in the
point c, the required point of intersection of A and Q.
Check. The projection c* is determined by the intersection
of A''and JS* C is independently determined by the intersec-
;

tion of A' and B". But c'' and C are two projections of the
same point, and hence must lie in the same projector.
Since the auxiliary plane X
may be any plane passed
through the line A, ease of construction often depends upon a
judicious choice of this plane. Ordinarily, the simplest con-
struction results when the auxiliary plane is taken perpen-
dicular to ^ or F (see the planes X and Y, Fig. 125).
104 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XII, § 119

Usual Method. Construction (Fig. 177). Let A be the given

line and Q the given plane. The auxiliary plane X is taken
through A and perpendicular to H. Planes X and Q intersect
in the line B. The projections A? and B° intersect in C, one
projection of the required point. The projections A!" and £* are
coincident, so that their intersection is indeterminate. Conse-
quently the projection &
must be located by projecting from c'.
The auxiliary plane X
might otherwise have been taken per-
pendicular to V, in which case c* would be determined by the
direct intersection of two projections, while C would need to

Fig. 177. Fig. 178.

be located by projection from &. The usual method does not

give the check on the construction which appears in the general
method. In applications, however, the gain in simplicity
usually more than compensates for this.
Special Case. The given plane is perpendicular to or F. H
Let the given plane Q, Fig. 178, be perpendicular to V. No
construction is necessary, since FQ is an edge view of the
plane, and in the Fprojection the point in which the line A
pierces the plane appears directly. The If-projection of this
point is obtained by projecting from the Fprojection.

120. The Shortest Distance from a Point to a Plane The

shortest distancefrom a given point to a given plane may be
obtained by dropping a perpendicular from the point to the
plane, and then measuring the length of this perpendicular.
XII, § 120] INTERSECTION OF PLANES 105

Problem 14. To find the shortest distance from a point to

a plane.
Analysis. Erom the given point drop a perpendicular to the
given plane. Find the foot of the perpendicular, that is, the
point in which the line pierces the given plane. Obtain the
true length of the perpendicular.
Note. Observe that this solution is a direct application of the previous
Problem.

Construction (Fig. 179). Let a be the given point, and Q the

given plane. From a draw the indefinite line, 0, perpendicular
to Q (§ 111). Find the point, b, in which C intersects Q

Fig. 179. Fig. 180.

(Prob. 13, § 119) ; in the figure, this is done by using the aux-
iliary plane X, perpendicular to H. Then a'S* and a^b" are the
projections of the required shortest distance, the true length
of which may be found by Problem 3 (§ 78 or § 80).
Special Case (Fig. 180). The given plane Q is parallel to
the ground line. The required perpendicular from a is evi-
dently a profile line, and may be drawn directly in the profile
projection as soon as the profile views of the given point and
and plane are obtained. In this case it is not necessary to
have the H- and F^projections of the perpendicular in order to
know its actual length these projections are, however, usually
;

considered a part of the problem, and are obtained by project-

ing from the profile view.
106 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XII, § 121

121. The Projection of a Point or Line on a Plane. The

projection of a point on a plane is the foot of the perpendicular
dropped from the point to the plane. This definition is not
confined to the coordinate planes of projection, but applies to
any plane in space. However, when a point is projected on to
some oblique plane represented by its traces on and V, the H
projection must in turn be represented by its projections on H
and V. Thus, in Figs. 179 and 180, the point 6 (6», &») is the
projection of the point a (a*, a") on the plane Q (HQ, VQ).
The projections of a straight line may be obtained by pro-
jecting any two of its points, and then connecting these pro-
jections.

Problem 15. To project a line on an oblique plane.

Analysis. From any two points on the given line, drop per-
pendiculars to the given plane. Eind the points in which

Fig. 181.

these lines intersect, respectively, the given plane, and connect

these points.
Construction (Eig. 181). Let it be required to project the
line ah on the plane Q. Erom a draw the line C {C'',0') per-
pendicular to the plane Q (§ 111), and find the point, e, where
C intersects Q (Prob. 13, § 119). Erom b draw the line D
perpendicular to Q, and find point /, where D intersects
Q. Then the line e/(e*/*, e"/") is the projection of ab on Q.
A second example is given in Eig. 182, the lettering and
explanation being the same as for the preceding figure. The
XII, § 121] INTERSECTION OF PLANES 107

fact that the projection ef crosses the given line ah shows that
this line intersects the plane Q at the point n, where ah and ef
intersect. Note that the projections n^ and n" are independ-

FiG. 182.

ently determined, and should check by lying in the same

projector.
Special Case. In Eig. 183 the given line A is known to be
parallel to the given plane Q (§ 104). Hence, to project on A

Fig. 183.

Q sufficient to project one point of A, as for example,

it is

point which projects at point e. Then the required liae B is

c,

drawn through e parallel to the line A.

 CHAPTER XIII

INTERSECTIONS OF PLANES AND SOLIDS BOUNDED BY

PLANE FACES

122. A Plane Determined by Two Lines. A plane is com-

pletely determined when any two of its lines, not necessarily
its traces, are known (§ 106). Hence, if a plane be given by
means of any two intersecting or parallel lines in space, it is

not always necessary, nor even desirable, to find its traces in

the solution of a problem in which such a plane occurs.

123. The Intersection of a Line with a Plane Determined by

Two Lines. Let it be required to find the point in which the

Fig. 184.

line C, Fig. 184, intersects the plane of the intersecting lines

A and B. Instead of finding the traces of the plane containing
A and B (Prob. 6, § 106), and then finding the point in which C
intersects this plane (Prob. 13, § 119), let us proceed at once, as
in the usual method of Problem 13, to pass through the line
108
XIII, § 123] INTERSECTION OF PLANES 109

C an auxiliary plane perpendicular to H

(or to V). The line
HX, coincident with C*, is the l?-trace and edge view of such
a plane. The plane X intersects the line A in point j (see
Fig. 178) and the line B in point Tc. The line D, connecting j
and &, must therefore be the line of intersection of the plane
X with the plane of the lines A and B. The projection i)°
intersects G" at e", which, for the same reasoning as that given
in Problem 13, must be one projection of the point in which
C intersects the plane of A and B. Finally, e* is found by pro-
jecting from e".
Note that in this solution the position of the ground line is
not essential. It may therefore be omitted.
Figure 185 shows how to apply this method to find the
point in which the profile line cd pierces the plane of the in-

tersecting lines A and B. Pass through cd a profile plane.

The plane of A and B intersects the profile plane in the
line ab. By means of a profile projection it is readily found
that the lines ab and cd intersect in the point e, the required
piercing point. In this figure the ground line is not omitted,
since it is necessary in order to find the profile projection.
Nevertheless the positions of the projections e* and e' are
independent of the position of the ground line.
no DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 124

124. The Intersection of Two Limited Plane Surfaces. Let it

be required to iind the intersection of the triangle abc, Fig.
186, with the plane, indefinite in length, but limited in width
by the parallel lines J and K. The intersection can be found,
without finding the traces of either plane, by applying the
preceding method, as follows. Using the auxiliary plane X
which contains J and is perpendicular to H, we find that the
liae J intersects the plane of the liaes ab and be in the point
d. Using the auxiliary plane T, containing K, this line inter-
sects the plane of the lines ac and 6c in the point e. There-
fore the plane JK iutersects the plane abc in tlie line de.

125. Visibility. If both the plane surfaces of Fig. 186 are

considered to be opaque, each of them must hide a portion of the

, I
II Ml

Fig. 186. Fig. 187.

other. The visibility of either projection must be determined

by means of information obtained from the other projection.
Thus, to determine the visibility of the IT-projection, take any
point in which intersect the projections of two lines not in the
same plane. For example, consider the point where K'^ inter-
sects ft'c*. This is actually the projection of two points, n in
XIII, § 126] INTERSECTION OF PLANES lU
the line be, and o in K. Project to the F-projection, obtaining
W and o". From we see that the point o is
these projections
higher than the point n that is, iT passes above be. Therefore,
;

in the H-projection, K'', which contains o*, is the visible line

at the point under consideration.
The other points in the jff-projection where the projections of
lines not ia the same plane cross each other can be tested in
the same way. This process finally results ia the visibility
shown in the figure.
We may reason also as follows : K has been found
the line
to be above the triangle at the point o. K intersects the
Now
triangle at the point e. Therefore beyond e the line K passes
out of sight under the triangle, so that at the point where K''
intersects a^c^, the latter must be the visible line ; and so on
around.
The visibility of the F-projection is similarly determined.
Begin at any point where the two projections of lines not in
the same plane cross each other, as for instance where J" inter-
sects WC°. Project to the H-yiew to find which line is in front
of the other. In this case, point r in ac is in front of point q
in J, therefore a'c' is visible, and J" is hidden by the triangle.
And so on until the complete visibility is found.
126. The Intersection of Two Planes Limited in One Direction.
Figure 187 represents the intersection of two planes, each
limited in width but indefinite in length. This case presents
one new feature over Fig. 186. Using auxiliary planes per-
pendicular to H, the line J intersects the plane AB in the point
d. But the line K
does not intersect the plane AB within the
limits of its extent.
If, however, the plane AB
extended indefinitely beyond B,
^ would intersect this plane in the point e, outside of B, and
de (d'e'j d*e*) would be the line of intersection of the plane
JK with such a plane. Therefore, the portion df of the line
de, which lies within the limits of the plane AB, must be the
intersection required.
The visibility of the two projections is obtained as explained
above.
112 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 127

127. The Intersection of a Plane and a Pyramid. Before be-

gmning to find the intersection, visualize the solid to deter-
mine its visible faces. Then when the first line of intersection
is found, if it be on a visible face, make it a full line. If it is
.

on an invisible face, make it a dotted line and so on for the

;

complete intersection. The evident advantage of this is that

the student will be able to visualize his work more readily and
more completely as he goes along. The construction of the

Fig. 188.

intersection requires merely the application and extension of

the preceding method.
In Eig. 188 let it be required to find the intersection of the
limited plane JK with the faces of the triangular pyramid
XIII, § 127] INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS 113

oabc. In the plan, all the faces are visible except the base
abc ; and obc are visible, while oac is not
in the elevation oab
visible. In beginning to find the intersection, take the lines
K
J and separately. Select any face of the pyramid, as oab.
Fiad the point 4 where J intersects the face oab, by using the
plane X
perpendicular to V. Similarly find 9, the point where
K iatersects the same face. The line 4-9 is then the inter-
section of plane JK
with face oab, and is made a full line in
both views, as oab is a visible face in both plan and elevation.
Taking another face of the pyramid, as oac, and proceeding as
before, K
is found to intersect at point 10, while J intersects

at the point 11, in the plane of oac, but outside the face itself.
Here it is well to note that while the actual face of the pyramid
is of limited extent, the plane of 'the face
is unlimited. Joining
10 with 11, the part from 10 to 12 is the actual intersection of
JK with the face oac, is a full line in plan, and dotted in ele-
vation. The line J has been found to enter the pyramid at
point 4, but the point where it comes out has not yet been
found. By inspection of the plan, J will necessarily come out
on face obc. The construction gives 6 as the point where J
pierces this face. The intersection of KJ with the face obc
will be the line 5-12, for as 12 is on the edge oc of the
pyramid, must be a point common to the intersections on
it

the adjoining faces oca and ocb. The line 5-12 is visible in
both plan and elevation.
It should be observed that since point 12 is th,e intersection
of plane JK with the edge of the pyramid, it might have been
obtained directly by finding where oc intersected the plane JK.
This would have been a convenient construction in case the
point 11 had fallen outside the limits of the drawing.
Completing the Visibility. With the intersection itself prop-
erly lined in with full and dotted line, the visible portion of
each edge of the pyramid or plane can usually be determined
by inspection. In case of doubt, however, the relative position
of two edges which apparently intersect in one view may be
determined by projecting the point of apparent intersection to
the other view (§ 125).
114 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 128

138. The Intersection of Two Solids Bounded by Plane Faces.

By further extending the preceding methods, the intersections
with each other of the surfaces of any two solids bounded by
plane faces — a broken line or lines usually known as intersec-
tion of the solids —can be found. The detail of the construc-
tion varies in each particular case, but involves nothing which
has not been already explained. In order not to get lost in the
construction, however, it is necessary to proceed in a system-
atic and orderly manner therefore, for the benefit of stu-
;

dents who may wish to follow through such a construction

before attempting one for themselves, we shall give the entire
detail of one typical construction.
The two solids chosen, Fig. 189, are a triangular right prism
whose long edges are the lines J, K, and L, and a wedge, with
a rectangular base adbe, and an edge cf parallel to the plane of
the base. Before starting to draw, we should notice from the
^-projection that the ends of the prism JKL are not con-
cerned in the intersection at all. Therefore it will be well to
begin by finding where the lines J, K, and L, considered sepa-
rately, intersect the other solid. We may notice also, if we
wish, that the face def of the wedgebe intersected by
will not
the prism. Again, it is evident that the line ad will not inter-
sect the prism. This information, however, is not of particular
importance at the start.
Before beginning to draw, it is well also to determine the
visible faces of each solid considered alone. Then, when any line
of the intersection is found, it can be visible only when it is the
intersection of two visible faces, one of each solid. The visi-

bility of the intersection being thus determined, and the visible

faces of each solid taken alone being known, the visible lines
in the combined figure usually can be determined by inspection.
In the case in hand, the F-projection shows that ad is the
highest edge of the wedge, hence ad is visible in plan. There-
fore df and de are also visible. It follows that the faces adfc,
adeb, and dfe are visible in plan. The plan shows cf as the
extreme back edge, hence in elevation this edge- is invisible.
This means that adeb is the only visible face in this view. For
XIII, § 128] INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS 115

Fig. 189. -The Intersection of Two Solids Bounded by Plane

Faces.
116 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 128

the other solid, /, the highest edge, is visible in plan, so the

facesJL and JK
are seen in plan. In elevation, and JK KL
are the visible faces;
To find the. actual intersection. Choose any face of the wedge,
as adeb, and find where all three edges K, J, and L in turn
intersect this face. The plane X, perpendicular to H, passed
through K, intersects adeb in the line 2-3, which crosses K
(seen in elevation) in point 6 ; K
intersects adeb then in point 6.
In the same way J" is found to intersect adeb in point 12 join- ;

ing 6 and 12 we have the intersection of face KJ with adeb.

Since both surfaces are visible in both plan and elevation, the
line 6-12 is a full line in each view. The line L is found to
intersect adeb produced in point 18. Join 12-18 and 6-18,
retaining only the portions 12-19 and 6-23, and the intersec-
tion of the prism KJL with face adeb is complete. The line
12-19 will be invisible in elevation and visible in plan, while
6-23 will be visible in elevation and invisible in plan. The
intersection of the two solids must evidently continue from the
points 23 and 19 on to the adjoining face bcfe, hence choose
next this face and find where J, K, and L intersect. Plane X
through K
intersects this face in the line 4-3, almost if not
quite parallel to K. This shows that K, and therefore also J
and L are nearly parallel to the face hcfe, so their points of
intersection are inaccessible. Therefore choose next another
face, as abc. Line K is found to intersect at point 5, and J at
point 16 in the face produced. Joining these points, the part
5-17 is the actual intersection of JK with the face, and is

invisible in both views. Line L does not actually intersect the

face, but will intersect the face produced. The plane Z through
L intersects the edges ac and be extended in the points 28 and
27, and when produced will cut L in 29. Manifestly,
this line
however, would be a very inaccurate construction to use
it

points so close together as 27 and 28 when the line must be

produced much beyond either point, and such a construction
should not be used without some check on its accuracy. In
this case, such a check is readily available. The planes X, T,
and Z are parallel', and their intersections with the plane abc
 —

XIII, § 128] INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS 117

Fia. 189. The Intbksbction of Two Solids Bounded by Plane

Faces.
 ;

118 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, §. 128

must be three parallel lines. Hence, in extending 27-28 to L

at 29, care should be taken to make the line parallel to the
intersections 1-4 and 7-10. Lines K, J, and L intersect the
face ahc or the face produced in points 5, 16, and 29 respec-
tively. Joining these points, the parts 5-17 (already noted),
21-22, and 5-26 form the complete intersection of KJL with
this face of the wedge. From the points 17 and 21 the inter-
section must continue on to the adjoining face acfd. A little

reflection will show that J must actually intersect this face.

The construction determines the point as 11. As point 17 is

in the plane JK and also acfd, 11-17 joined will be the inter-
section of JK with face acfd, and likewise 11-21 is the intersec-
tion of JL with the same face of the wedge. There remains
to be found the intersection on the face hcfe. No further points
need to be found, however, for as 26 and 23 are both in this
face and also in the plane KL the line connecting them will be
the intersection of KL with the face. Similarly 22-19 is the
intersection of JL with the face, which completes the intersec-
two solids.
tion of the
Having shown the visibility of the intersection in both views
as soon as found, notice that the portions of the edges of the
solids which are finally visible may be readily determined by
inspection. (The student should take pains to satisfy himself
as to the correctness of the visibility of each edge as shown.)
As a check, start with any point of the intersection, as 5
by tracing 5-17-11-21-22-19-12-6-23-26-5, we return to the
starting point. In this case there is but one continuous inter-
section. With different positions of the solids, however, there
may be two intersections. This happens, for example, when
one solid completely penetrates the other.
129. The Intersection of a Sphere with Another Solid. Sup-
pose that we have two intersecting solids, the first a sphere,
the second any solid bounded by plane faces. Pass an auxil-
iary plane parallel to H, so as to cut both solids. This plane
will cut from the sphere a circle, and from the other solid a
polygon of three or more sides. Both the circle and polygon
will project in true shape and size in the fi'-view, where any
XIII, § 128] INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS 119

Fig. 189. — The Intebsbction of Two Solids Bounded by Plane

Faces.
120 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 129

points of intersection may be noted. These points will evi-

dently lie on the line or lines of intersection of the two solids.
An auxiliary plane parallel to V may be similarly used, the
sections cut from the two solids appearing in true shape and
size in the F-projection. In any particular problem, therefore,
the solution would be effected by planes parallel to H, or to V,
according to convenience. Indeed, it is often desirable to use
auxiliary planes in each of these directions.
The above method of solution can be applied to special cases
of the intersection of a sphere with some of the curved solids.
For example, curved solid be a circular right cylinder
let the
with its axis perpendicular to H. Planes parallel to fl'will
cut circles, while planes parallel to Fwill cut rectangles from
this cylinder. Hence the analysis previously given can be
applied to this case.
In general, if two intersecting solids are such, and so placed
that planes parallel to H or to F will intersect both solids in
simple, readily determined figures, such as straight lines or
circles, the intersection of the solids may be found by the use
of such planes as auxiliaries.
A few simple examples are given in the following Articles.
The Intersection of a Sphere with a Prism (Kg. 190).
130.
Given the sphere and the triangular right prism abc-def, both
placed in the first quadrant. It is evident that the intersection
is formed by the three vertical sides of the prism, therefore
the plan of the intersection coincides with the plan of the
prism. The intersection of each vertical side of the prism is

here found as explained in § 84. (See Figs. 1 08 and 109.)

Let us consider, fer example, the face cbfd. The points 1
and 5 are located at once in the elevation on S", the other pro-
jection of circle B. The plane B cuts from the sphere the
circle B. How is its diameter found ? The vertical side of
the prism intersects this circle in the points 2 and 8.
The other points, 3, 4, 6, 7, are found in a similar manner,
and the ellipse drawn. It may be noted that the ellipse in
elevation has its major axis vertical and equal in length to
l'-5*, while its minor axis is equal to IvS".
XIII. § 130] INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS 121

The intersections of the other two sides of the prism are

found in a similar manner, as in Fig. 190. The F-projection of
the first intersection is a com-
plete ellipse, but the other two
are partial ones, with the
points 10 and 11 in common.
Visibility. In any case of
the intersection of two sur-
faces, not only the visible part
of the intersection should be
shown, but also the visible
edges and the outlines of the
surfaces, as ia § 129.
Visible Intersections.
The face first considered, cbdf,
is the back of the prism, hence
its intersection with the sphere
is wholly invisible in eleva-
tion. The other two faces are
each visible in elevation. In
each case as much of the inter-
section as lies on the front or
visible half of the sphere will
be visible in elevation, that is,
10 to 13 and 11 to 14 on the
right-hand curve, 10 to 16 and
11 to 17 on the left-hand curve.
Visible Edges and Out-
lines. The edge ae of the
prism is the front edge, and intersects the sphere at the points
10 and 11 on the front half. Hence ae is visible from a" to 10",
and from 11" to e°. Since the edge cd is tangent to the sphere
at point 5on the back half, cd disappears on V where it crosses
the outline of the sphere. Hence the outline of the sphere
is visible from the toward the right as far as points 16"
left
and 17". Likewise, the edge hf passes behind the sphere, and
the outline of the sphere is visible from 13" around to 14".
122 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 131

131. The Intersection of a Sphere with d Right Cylinder.

Example 1 (Fig. 191). Given a sphere and a circular cylin-
der. The plan of the intersection is evidently the arc of the
circle 1*5*7*, and a study of this plan view -will show that the
intersection consists of one continuous curve. The points 1
and 7, shown in plan on the outline of the sphere, are projected
directly to 1' and 7". The points 4, 10, 6, 8, must lie on the

Fig. 192.

great circle of the sphere in elevation, and are projected at once

to 4', 10', 6' andOther points are found by means of aux-
8".

iliary planes parallel to V, as in the preceding figure. The

plane T, passed through c*, gives the points 3" and 11", in which
XIII, § 131] INTERSECTION OF SOLIDS 123

the intersection is tangent to the outline of the cylinder. The

visibility of the curve and of the outlines of the surfaces is
determined as previously explained.
Example 2 (Fig. 192). Given a sphere and an elliptical cylin-
der. The intersection and the visibility are found as in Ex-
ample 1. Notice that here two parts of the curve are visible.
Example 3 (Fig. 193). Given a sphere and a circular cylin-
der. In this ease an inspection of the plan serves to show that
the intersection will consist of two curves, each entirely distinct
from the other. Each curve in elevation will be symmetrical
with respect to the horizontal center line of the sphere (why?).
The solution is left to the student.

Fig. Fig. 194.

Example 4 Given a sphere and a circular cylin-

(Fig. 194).
der. In this example may
not be so easy to vizualize the
it

intersection by considering the plan view. Nevertheless a

little study will show that there must be two closed figures

having a common point a. As a matter of fact the intersection

when found in elevation will be shaped like an irregular figure
 ;

124 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIII, § 131

8, the curve crossing itself (not tangent), at a. It is called

a one-ciirve intersection. The solution is left to the student.

133. The Intersection of a Cylinder and a Torus. Another

example is shown in Eig. 195. An auxiliary plane, as Q, par-
allel to H, cuts the cylinder in the elements A and B, and the

torus in the circles O and D, giving six points, 1, 2, ... 6, of

the intersection. The chosen secant planes, parallel to H) should

Fig. 195.

include one through the contour element E of the cylinder

one through the highest element, G ; one through the center of
the torus ; and one tangent at the bottom of the torus. The
points 7 and 8 of the intersection evidently lie in the plane X,
which passes through the center of the torus parallel to V.
 CHAPTER XIV
PROBLEMS INVOLVING THE REVOLUTION OF PLANES

133. A Line Lying in a Given Plane. One method of locating

a line so that it will lie ia a given plane is to assume the traces
of the line in the corresponding traces of the plane. This has
already been explained in § 97. (See Fig. 123.)

Fig. 123 (repeated).

Another method is to assume one of the projections of the

line. As soon as either the ^-'or the F-projection of a line is

assumed, the line becomes definite from the condition that it

shall lie in the given plane.

Problem 16. Given om projection of a line lying in a plane, to

find the other projection.

Analysis. The other projection of the line will be deter-

mined if two points on it are found. Whenever it is practi-

cable, the simplest points to consider are the two traces, s and t,
which lie, respectively, in the horizontal and vertical traces of
the given planes (§ 96). One trace of the line will be at the
intersection of the given projection with the corresponding
trace of the plane, the other projection of this point being in
GL. The other trace of the line will be in the other trace of
the plane, and is determined by a projector drawn from the
intersection of the given projection with OL.
125
126 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, § 133

Construction (Eig. 196). Let the plane Q and tlie projection

A!" be given. The intersection of A'^ and HQ is the S'-trace of
the liae A (§ 96). The F-projection, s", of this point lies in
QL. The intersection of A'' and QL is thcS-projection of the

Fig. 196.

Ftrace of the line (Prob. 1, § 37). The actual trace, f, lies La

VQ. The projection A' is now determined, since two points,
s" and P, are known.

Similarly, the projection ^' may be found if A" is given.

Fig. 197.

A second example is given in Fig. 197. The lettering and

explanation are the same as for Eig. 196.
. : Special Case I. Suppose that the given projection is par-
allel (a) to the corresponding trace of the plane ; or (6) to the
ground line. In either event the line should be recognized as
one of the principal lines of the plane (§ 99), parallel to or H
V as the case may be. Thus, in Fig. 198, if J.* is given parallel
to HQ, A" is parallel to OL; or if A" is given parallel to QL,
then J.* is parallel to .ffQ. The line A in this case is a horizontal
XIV, § 133] A LINE IN_ A PLANE^ 127

principal liae of Q, having its F-trace at the point <"(**>*")•

Similarly, if A" is given parallel to VQ, A'' is parallel to GL,
and vice versa, the line being a vertical principal line of Q.

Fig. 198.

Special Case II. Suppose that both the plane and the
given projection of the line are parallel to the ground line.
Whichever projection of the liae is given, the other projection
will also be parallel to the ground line. Let Q, Pig. 199, be the
given plane, and suppose A'' to be given. One point will be

Q-

Ha"
128 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, §133

Special Case Suppose that the given plane is perpen-

III.
dicular to H or Let the given plane Q, Fig. 200, be perpen-
V.
dicular to //. Then if A" is given, in any position except
perpendicular to GL, J.* coincides with HQ, since this trace is
an edge view of the plane Q (§§ 51 and 98). In the exceptional
position, shown by B" perpendicular to QL, the if-projection,
JS', reduces to a point on HQ.

Fig. 200. Fig. 201.

Conversely, if A^ is given coincident with HQ, A" may be

taken at random in any position except perpendicular to OL,
and the case is indeterminate.
But if the given plane Q, Fig. 201, be perpendicular to H, and
if ^* be assumed not coincident with HQ, the solution becomes
impossible, for there are no points in the plane Q to correspond
with the assumed projections c*, d*, or in fact with any point
of -4* except the intersection, e', of A!* and HQ. The results
are similar if the given plane is perpendicular to V-

CoKOLLAEY I. Oiveu one projection of a point lying in a

plane, to find the other projection.
Analysis. Through the given point pass any line lying in
the plane. Eind the other projection of the line. This pro-
jection must contain the required projection of the given point.
Construction (Fig. 202). Let Q be the given plane, and as-
sume a* to be given it is required to find a". Through a*
;

draw the ZT-projection, M'', of some line in the plane Q. In

general, the simplest construction results when the assumed
line is a principal line of the plane hence Jf" is here, drawn
;

parallel to HQ. Find M' (Special Case I). Then a" lies on
XIV, § 133] A LINE IN A PLANE 129

M" and is obtained by projecting from a\ Tlie reverse of this

construction will locate a* when a° is given.

Fig. 202. Fig. 203.

CoEOLLAKV II. To find the second projection of a line lying

in a plane when the general solution fails, partially or wholly.
Let Q, Fig. 203, be the given plane, and let a* 6' be given so
that it cannot be produced to intersect either HQ or GL

within the limits of the figure. Then a" and 6", or in general
any two points on the line, may be located by Corollary I.
CoEOLLAET III. To find a line of maximum inclination of
a plane.
Let Q, Pig. 204, be the given plane. A line of maximum
iaclination to J? is perpendicular to HQ (§ 114). Hence assume
A^ perpendicular to HQ, and find A' by the general method.

Fig. 204. Fig. 205.

In Fig. 205, the line B is in the plane E, and is a line of

maximum inclination to V. The projection B' is taken per-
pendicular to VB, and then B'' is found.
130 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, § 134

:- 13^ Revolution of a Plane About an Axis Perpendicular to H

or V. As an illustration of the general case of this problem,
let it be required to revolve the plane Q, Fig. 206, through an
angle, a, about the line A, perpendicular to H, as an axis.
The axis pierces Q at the point c (c*, C). This poiat is found
most readily by observing that since ^
is a point, & coiucides

with ^*. Then c' is one projection of a point lying in plane

Q, hence c" is the correspondiag projection (Prob. 16, Cor. 1,

§ 133). In any revolution of Q about A, the point c will re-

maiu fixed. Now a plane is determined when a point and a
line are known ; hence, having the fixed point c, it will be
necessary to revolve but one liue of Q. This liae may con-
veniently be the S'-traee, HQ„ of Q, which is now revolved
about c* The F-trace,
as a center to the required position HM.
VR, is R must con-
then determined by the fact that the plane
tain the point c. Consequently B, contains the line N, drawn
through c and parallel to HU. (See Example 3, § 108.)
Let now the plane Q, Eig. 206, be further revolved, iintil the
iT-trace takes position US, perpendicular to the ground line.

;-.;-. _
XIV, § 135] THE REVOLUTION OF PLANES 131

an axis perpendicular to V. This is done in Eig. 207, wKere

fixe plane Q is revolved about the line A, perpendicular to V,
until the F-traee of the plane, in its new position VR, is

perpendicular to the ground line. Then HB is an edge

view of the plane, and passes through c*. In this figure, the
axis A, besides being perpendicular to V, is taken lying
in H, which simplifies the finding of the point c, in which A
intersects Q.
As in the revolution of a straight line (§§ 78, 79), a plane,
when revolved about an axis perpendicular to H, maintains
always its original angle with H. If the axis is peipendicular
to V, the angle between the revolvtag plane and F does not
change.

135. The Distance between Two Parallel Planes. As a simple

application of the revolution of planes about axes perpendicular
to Hoi V, we will consider the following Problem.

Problem 17. To find the perpendicular distance between two

parallel planes.

Analysis. Assume an axis perpendicular to ^(or V), and

revolve both planes about this axis until they are perpendicular
to F(or^). The perpendicu-
lar distance between the planes
will then appear.
Construction (Fig. 208). Let
Q and R be the given planes.
Assume the axis A
perpendicu-
lar to H, and for convenience
lying in V. Revolve both
planes about the axis A until
they are perpendicular to V
(§ 134). Then the new F-traces,
FQi and VRi, are the edge
views of the planes, and the
Fig. 208.
perpendicular distance, p, be-
tween these traces is equal to the distance between the
planes.
 : ;

132 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, § 135

CoROLLABT. To find the perpendicular distance from a point

toa plane.
Analysis. Take an axis perpendicular to (or V) throughH
the given point. About this axis, revolve the plane until it is
perpendicular to V (or H). Then, since the given point on
the axis does not move, or change its relation to the plane,
the perpendicular distance appears directly in the F(or H)
projection.
The construction is left to the student. The problem is the
same as Problem 14 (§ 120), a different method of solution hav-
ing now been found.

136.The Angles between an Oblique Plane and the Coordinate

Planes. The angle which a given plane Q, oblique to both H
and F, makes with either coordinate plane, for example H, may-
be found
(a) by drawing in the plane a line of maximum inclination

to H (Prob. 16, Cor. 3, § 133) and then finding the angle which
this line makes with If (§ 79 or § 82);

(6) by finding the edge view of the plane on a secondary

plane of projection taken perpendicular to HQ (§ 70)
(c) by revolving the plane about an axis perpendicular to H
until the plane is perpendicular to V (§ 134).
The various constructions resulting from these different
methods resemble each other to a considerable extent, and are
essentially the same, so that it is needless to take them all up
in detail. The method chosen in this text is thought to be the
one which best shows the connection between this problem and
the two that follow.

Problem 18. To find the angles which an oblique plane makes

with H and V.
Analysis. To find the angle between the given plane and H,
assume an axis of revolution lying in V and perpendicular to
H. Revolve the plane until perpendicular to V, when the
angle between the new F-trace and the ground line will be the
angle the plane makes with if (§§ 134, 136). Similarly for
the angle between the given plane and V. ;
XIV, § 136] THE REVOLUTION OF PLANES 133

Construction (Tig. 209). Let Q be the given plane. Assume

the axis A, lying in V and perpendicular to H. Revolve Q
about A to the position R {HR, VR),
perpendicular to V (§ 134). Then
the angle between VR and GL is
the angle which Q makes with H.
a,

Similarly, by revolving about the

axis B, lying in H and perpendicular
to V, we obtain the angle ^, which Q
makes with V.
It will be seen in Eig. 209 that the
traces HR and VS, perpendicular to
OL, are not essential to the required
angles a and ^, and that these traces
may therefore be omitted. This is
done in Pig. 210, in which are found
the angles a and j8, which the given plane Q makes with
H and V, respectively.
134 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, § 137

137. Planes making Given Angles with H and V. The pre-

ceding problem gives rise to two converse problems, in which
it is required to find planes which make given angles with the
coordinate planes.
Problem 19. Given one trace of a plane, and the angle which the
plane makes with either H or V, to find the other trace of the plane.
There are two cases, which are stated below.
Analysis. The required result may be obtained by revers-
ing the construction of Problem 18.
Case I. Giuen one trace and the angle which the plane makes
with the same coordinate plane.
Construction (Fig. 212). Let HQ and the angle a, which Q
makes with Jff, be given. Assume the axis A, lying in V and
perpendicular to H. Revolve the given trace HQ about this
axis to the position HE, perpendicular to GL. Complete the
plane in this position by drawing VB at the given angle, «,

Fig. 212. Fig. 213.

with H. Then B intersects the axis A at the point c (C, c').

Let B now be supposed to be revolved back about the axis A
until HE
coincides with HQ
the point c remains fixed.
; Since
c" is in V, VQ
must pass through c", and is determined by this
point and the point in which HQ intersects GL.
The given trace HQ may also be revolved to the position
HBi, giving a second point c,", and a second result, VQi. The
distances of c" and c," from GL are obviously the same, hence
VQ and VQi make equal angles with GL.
XIV, § 137] THE REVOLUTION OP PLANES 135

It is evident in Eig. 212 that the construction is possible for

any given angle a between 0° and 90". If « = 90°, but one
result is possible, and no construction is necessary. Why ?
Case II. Given owe trace and the angle which the plane
makes ivith the other coordinate plane.
Construction (Fig. 213). Let VQ and the angle a, which the
plane makes with H, be given. Assume an axis, A, lying in
V and perpendicular to H. Since A" and VQ are both lines in
V, they intersect, locating the point c (c, c'), in which A inter-
sects the plane Q. Place the plane li, perpendicular to V, so
as to pass through c, and making the given angle,
a, with H.

Revolve R about A. In this revolution, the angle « with H

does not change (§ 134) hence ; HQ
must be tangent to the
arc ef, drawn with c' as center and radius c*e. This, together
with the fact that HQ
must pass through the point n, in
which VQ intersects GL, determines HQ.
The point e may also be revolved in the opposite direction,
along the arc ef, thus giving a second possible result, HQi,
drawn through n and tangent to ef It is evident that HQ
and HQi make equal angles with the ground line.

This construction is possible only when the given acute

angle which Q makes with H, is greater than the acute
«,
angle which VQ makes with GL. If a is given as exactly
equal to the angle between VQ and GL, no construction is
necessary, and only one result is possible. Why ?
Special Case. The two cases of this problem merge into
one when the given trace is parallel to the ground line, the
solution being eiiected by means of an assumed profile plane.
(Compare Eig. 211.) There are always two possible results
for any given value of a or ^8 greater than 0° and less than 90°.

Problem 20. Given the angles which a plane makes with H and
V, to find the traces of the plane.

As in the preceding problems, we shall call the angle with

H, a, and the angle with V, /8. If any plane can be found
which makes the angles a with H and ji with V, there is an
infinite number of parallel planes making the same angles. The
136 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, § 137

location of the plane becomes definite only when some point

lying in the plane known. But a plane may be readily trans-
is

ferred, parallel to itself, from one position to another (see Prob.

9, § 107). Hence, the problem as stated will be considered
solved when any one of the series of parallel planes is found.
Analysis. It is evident that the construction in Fig. 209, in
which a and /3 are found for a given plane Q, cannot be readily
reversed. But consider Fig. 214, in which a and j8 for the given
plane Q are found by taking the axes
of revolution, A and B, through the
same point, o, in the ground line.
Since VM is an edge view of Q, the
perpendicular distance from o to Q
is equal to the perpendicular ok,
dropped from o to VR. Moreover,
since HS is an edge view of Q, the
perpendicular distance from o to Q
is equal to the perpendicular om,
dropped from o to HS. Hence oh =
om, whence it follows that the two
edge views, VE and HS, are each
tangent to a circle drawn with o as
Fig. 214.
center and radius ok = om. The
plane Q may now be obtained from the angles a and fi by
reversing this construction.
Construction (Fig. 215). Assume any point o on the ground
line. Through o draw an axis perpendicular to the ground
line. With o as center, draw a circle with any assumed
radius, the radius being the distance from o to the required
plane Q.
Tangent to the circle, draw the edge view VH, which repre-
sents the plane perpendicular to V, at the given angle a with
H. Now VB intersects the axis at c, and the ground line at e.
Hence c is the fixed point on VQ, while HQ must be tangent
to the arc ef, drawn about o as center with the radius oe.
Again, tangent to the circle, draw the edge view HS, which
represents the plane perpendicular to H, at the given angle /3
XIV, § 137] THE REVOLUTION OF PLANES 137

with V. We find that HS intersects the axis at d, and the

ground line at g. Hence, d is the fixed point on HQ, while VQ
must be tangent to the arc gj, drawn with center o and radius og.

Fig. 215.

We now have one point each on HQ and VQ, and an arc to

which each is tangent. Therefore HQ and VQ are determined.
Check. Since HQ and VQ are independently determined,
they must intersect the ground line at the same point, n.
If a and ^ are given as acute angles, as is usual, a solution
is possible only when the sum of a and fi is not less than 90°

nor more than 180°. But when the sum of these angles is
greater than 90°, and each angle is less than 90°, four possible
may be found.
non-parallel results
Thus, having found the plane Q, Eig. 215, making a with H
and y8 with V, make on' = on. Then it is evident by symme-
try that the plane T, drawn with VT through c and n', and
HT n', makes the same angles.
through d and Also, make
oe' = oc,
and draw VX through n and c'. Then VX makes the
same angle with GL as does VQ, hence taking HX
coincident
with HQ, plane X
makes with H
and V the same angles as
does Q (compare Eig. 212). A fourth result, plane Y (VY,
HY) is obtained by symmetry from plane X.
138 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIV, § 137

There are other methods of obtaining the three additional

results after the first plane Q is obtained. Thus, a distance
od' = od might be laid off below the ground line, and if-traces
drawn from d' to n and «'. But after four npn-parallel results
are obtained, all further results will be parallel to some plane
already found. This is because there are but four possible
slopes of an oblique plane (1) downward, forward, to the
:

right; (2) downward, backward, to the right; (3) downward,

forward, to the left (4) downward, backward, to the left.
;

(See § 49.) The slope of a plane is the same as the slope of

its lines of maximum inclination to H. These lines, if desired,
may be found by Problem 16, Cor. 3, § 133.
Special Case. The sum of a and /3 is 90°. The plane is
then parallel to the ground line, and its profile trace is its edge
view. Hence (Fig. 216), assume any profile plane of projec-
tion. Draw two non-par-
allel profile traces making

the given angles with H

and V, and find the corre-
sponding H- and F-traces.
Only two results are possi-
ble, corresponding to the
two possible slopes down- :

ward and forward, and

downward and backward
(or upward and backward,
upward and forward).
Other special cases,
which may be solved by
inspection, result when
(1) either « or ^8 is 0°, in which case the other angle must be
90° (one result) ;. (2) either a or /3 is 90°, the other angle being
greater than 0° and less than 90° (two results) ; (3) a = ;8 = 90°
(one result). These cases are left to the student.
 CHAPTER XV
OTHER PROBLEMS INVOLVING THE REVOLUTION OF
PLANES

138. The Revolution of a Plane about One of Its Traces. A

very useful revolution of a plane is that in which the plane is
revolved about one of its own traces as an axis. For example,
the plane Q may be revolved about HQ as an axis until Q
coincides with H. The figure is left for the student to draw.
Any points, lines, or figures contained in Q will be carried by
this revolution into the coordinate plane, where they will
appear in their true sizes and relations.

Problem 21. To find the position of a point lying in a plane,

when the plane is revolved into H or V about the corresponding trace.
Note. Since only one projection of a point lying in a plane can, in
general, be assumed, it may be necessary to find the second projection by
the use of Problem 16 (§133), before attempting to solve the present
problem.

Analysis. Suppose point a lying in plane Q, to be revolved

about HQ until it lies in H. The figure is left to the student.
The process is the same as described in § 76, and shown pic-
torially in Fig. 98. The s^tatement of § 76 may be modified to
meet the present situation, as follows. If a point a lying in
plane Q, be revolved about HQ
as an axis, the circular path
of the revolving point will project on jSTas a straight line per-
pendicular to HQ. If the point a be revolved into H, its

revolved position will be at a distance from HQ equal to the

true distance of the point from HQ.
An analogous statement applies to the revolution of a point
about VQ into V.
139
140 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XV, § 138

Let a, lying in the plane Q, be the

Construction (Fig. 217).
given point, and let be required to revolve a about
it into HQ
H. From a* draw the line a'e' perpendicular to HQ, and pro-
duce the line indefinitely. This line is the ZT-projection of the
circular path of the revolving point, the center of revolution
being the point e (e*) lying on HQ. The line a^e* is one pro-

FlG, 217. Fig. 218.

jection of a line lying in Q (a line of maximum inclination to

H, § 114). Find a»e« (Prob. 16, § 133), and the true length,
a'ei, of the line ae (Prob. 3, § 78). The distance We^ is the
actual distance of the point a from the center of revolution e*.

Lay off e^a^ = Wei, thus giving the required revolved position a,.

Note. The revolved position a, represents the revolution of Q about

HQ through an angle greater than 90°. The distance we\ may be laid off
from e* in the opposite direction if preferred (that is, on the same side of
HQ as tlie projection a*"), representing the revolution of Q
through an
angle less than 90". It is customary to place the revolved position where
it will be as far from the other parts of the figure as possible.

In Fig. 218, the point a, lying in Q, is revolved about VQ

into V. The construction is entirely analogous to that for
revolving about HQ into H, and is left without further explana-
tion to the student.
Working Rule. Returning to Pig. 217, the revolved posi-
tion, a„ is obtained by laying off from e*, on the perpendicular
XV, § 138] THE REVOLUTION OF PLANES 141

a'e*, a certain distance, namely, the true length of the line ae.
The situation of this line is such that it is not necessary to
draw the complete construction, or even the F-projection, a'^e",
in order to find the true length. For, it will be seen that the
true length, a^e^, is the hypothenuse of a right triangle, of
which the base is Cif =
a^e*, and the altitude a'f. may We
therefore state the following working rule To revolve point a, :

lying in the plane Q, about HQ

into H, proceed as follows.
From a* draw a line perpendicular to HQ. Then the revolved
position, a,, lies on this perpendicular, at a distance from HQ
equal to the hypothenuse of a right triangle, of which the two
sides are the distances a* to HQ, and a" to OL. This hypoth-
enuse can be found directly with the dividers, as follows Take :

the distance a^e' set it off from / to point e^ on the ground

;

line span the distance from Ci to a°.

;

Similarly, to revolve a point lying in a plane about the V-

trace of the plane into V (Fig. 218), find the hypothenuse of a
right triangle, of which the two sides are the distance from the
F^projection of the point to the F-trace of the plane, and from
the ZT-projection of the point to the ground line. This hy-
pothenuse is the true distance of the revolved point from the
Ftrace of the plane.
Special Case. The trace of the plane about which the
revolution is made is perpendicular
to the ground line. Let HQ, Fig.
219, be perpendicular to GL, VQ
being at any angle. The plane Q
is therefore perpendicular to V, so
that the revolution of the given
point occurs in a plane which is

parallel to V. The path of the

revolution must then project on V
in its true shape, that is, as a
circular arc, and the revolved posi-
Fig. 219.
tion, a„ can be obtained at once
by projecting from the intersection of this arc and the
ground line.
142 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XV, § 138

The ease with which the revolved position is obtaiaed la

this particular situation of the plane suggests another method
for solving the general case, since an auxiliary plane of pro-
jection can always be assumed perpendicular to either trace of
XV, § 140] PROBLEMS OF REVOLUTION 143

VQ, and will revolve just as far. Hence, the revolved position
A, passes through c, and is parallel to VQ.

Fig. 221. Fig. 222.

139. Solution of Plane Problems by Revolution of the Plane.

By extending the preceding problem, any number of points or
lines lying in a plane can be revolved into one of the coordinate
planes, and the revolved position will show the true relation
existing between them. The problem thus becomes a very
useful auxiliary in the solution of a certain class of problems.
In revolving about either trace of a plane, as for example
about HQ into H, it should be noticed that, while the T^pro-
jections of the points and lines concerned must be considered,
no use is made of the F-trace of the plane, VQ. Similarly,
when revolving about VQ into V, no use is made of HQ.
Hence, when a plane is introduced as an auxiliary, for the ex-
press purpose of revolving about one of its traces, it is usually
unnecessary to find more tlian one trace of the plane.
140. The Angle between Two Intersecting Lines. The angle
between two intersecting straight lines is a plane angle. It is
measured in the plane that is determined by the two lines.
Problem 22. To find the angle between two intersecting lines.

Analysis. Eind the plane containing the given lines. About

one trace of this plane, revolve the lines into the corresponding
coordinate plane, when the true angle between them will appear.
144 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XV, § 140

Construction (Eig. 223). Let A and B be the given lines.

Find either trace of the plane containing these lines, for
example the /f-trace, HX. (Prob. 6, § 106). Revolve both lines

Fig. 223. Fig. 224.

about HX into H. To accomplish this most readily, revolve

their poiat of intersection, o, to o, (Prob. 21, Working Rule,
§ 138). Then A^ passes through o, and the trace Si, while B^
passes through and the trace s^ (Corollary, § 138).
o, The
angle, 8, between A, and B^ is the true angle between the lines.
A similar construction is shown in Eig. 224, in which the
F-trace, FX, of the plane containing A and B is used. The
angle, 8, between A, and B,., is the true angle between the lines.
Special Case. One line is parallel to H, and the other is
parallel to F. The angle may be found by the general method,
but the following is simpler.
Analysis. Revolve either
line ab^ut the other as axis, until
both are parallel to the same coordinate plane.
Construction (Eig. 225). Let A and B be the given lines.
Choose one of them, as A, for the axis. Since A is parallel to
H, B must now be revolved about A until B, also, is parallel to
H. Assume any point c{&-, c") in the line B, at a reasonable
distance from the intersection, o, of the lines. Through c*
draw an indefinite line perpendicular to A!". Take the distance
o'"c!' in the compasses, and with o* as center strike an arc across
XV, § 140] PROBLEMS OF REVOLUTION 145

this perpendicular, giving c,. Then d'c, is B revolved, B„

and the angle between B^ and A!" is the true angle S, between
the given lines.
Proof of the Construction. Since A
is parallel H, the revolution of
to
point c about A will project on if as a
straight line perpendicular to A (§ 76).
Hence c revolved, e^, must lie some-
where on the perpendicular to A
through c*.. Also, when the portion oc,
of the line B is revolved until parallel
to H, it will appear in true length.
Since the point o in the axis A does
not move, oH^ should equal the true
length of oc. But o'^c, was made equal
to o^'ti', which is the true length of oc,
since the line B is parallel to V. Fig. 22S.
Hence the construction is correct.
Corollary. To find the projections of the bisector of the angle
between two intersecting lines.

Let it be required to find the bisector of the acute angle. In

Fig. 223, draw first the actual bisector, C„ in the revolved
position, bisecting the angle between A^ and B,. Now C,
necessarily passes through o„ and in this case intersects the
trace HX in the point Ss*. Imagine the plane X to be counter-
revolved (revolved back) about HX to its original position,
takiag with it the lines A, B, and C. The lines A and B, and
their intersection, point o, will resume their former positions.
The point S3*, being on the axis of revolution HX, will not
move. Hence the S"-projection, C, of the line C must pass
through o* and s/.
To find the F-projection of C, note that 0* must be projected
to o", while Sj*, being an ^-trace, lies in H, and must project
to Sj" in OL. Hence 0°
determined by o" and Sj".
is

The second example. Fig. 224, cannot be solved, however, in

this way. As soon as the bisector, G„ is drawn in the revolved
position, it is seen that the intersection of C^ with the trace VX
 ;

146 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XV, § 140

isbeyond the limits of the iigure. One point of C" is o°, and
one point of C* is o*. It remains to find a second point in each
projection. Assume a point, e^, in (7,. Through e^ draw the
revolved position, L^, of a line lying in the plane of the given
lines, by making i, parallel to
the revolved position of either
of the given lines A or B; in this
case L^ is drawn parallel to A^.
Since the line L is in the plane X,
the intersection, ij", of L^ and VX
is the F-trace of the line L, and
ij* is in GL. Also, since the line L
is parallel to the line A, through
^3" draw L" parallel to A", and
through ^s* draw L' parallel to A''.

Now e is a point ui the line L.

Fig. 224 (repeated).
Hence revolve back from e, per-
pendicular to VX, and find e" on L' ;
project from e" and
obtain on i*. Since e
e* is a point also in the line C, we have
C' determined by o" and e", and C* determined by o'' and e\

The Angle between a Line and a Plane.

141. The angle
which a line makes with a plane is equal to the angle between
the line and its projection on the plane. Hence we only need
to find the angle between two intersecting straight lines.

Problem 23. To find the angle between a line and a plane.

Project the given line on the given plane.

First Analysis.
Eind the true angle between the given line and its projection
this is the angle required.
Second Analysis. Erom any point of the given line, drop a
perpendicular to the given plane. Eind the true angle between
the given line and the perpendicular ; this is the complement of
the required angle.
In general, the second analysis gives the simpler construc-
tion,and is the one usually adopted.
Construction (Fig. 226). Let A be the given line and Q the
given plane. Assume any point c (c*, c") on A. Erom c draw
XV, § 141] PROBLEMS OF REVOLUTION 147

the line B (5*, Q (§ 111). Eind

B") perpendicular to the plane
the true angle, between the lines A and B (Prob. 22, § 140).
8,

Then y, which is the complement of 8, is equal to the true

angle between line A and plane Q.

Fig. 226. Fig. 227.

In Eig. 227, the given plane Q is parallel to the ground line.

The general case still applies, but there is an extra detail in
the construction. As before, assume any point c in the line A.
From drop the perpendicular B to the plane Q. Eind the
c

angle, S, between the lines A and B. Then y, the complement

of 8, is the angle required. As a necessary step in finding the
angle 8, we need one trace, as VX, of the plane containing the
lines A and B. To determine VX we need the y-trace of each
of these lines. The F-trace of A is readily found (Prob. 1,
§ 37). But 5 is a profile line, of which but one point, c, is
known. Nevertheless, the line 5 is a definite line, since it is

perpendicular to Q. To find the F-trace of B, proceed as fol-

lows : Eind the profile projection, c", of c ; also the profile
trace, PQ, of Q. From C draw the profile projection of B, B"
perpendicular to PQ. Then the F-trace of B is the point fjj
in which B" intersects VP. (See Prob. 11, Special Case 2, § 115.)
148 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XV, § 142

142. A Rectilinear Figure Lying in a Plane. A plane poly-

gon of more than three sides cannot be assumed by assuming
at random the projections of a number of porats in space, and
then connecting these points by straight lines. Eor, as soon as
three points not in the same straight line have been assumed,
a plane is determined thereafter some consideration is neces-
;

sary to assure us that the remaining points lie in the plane

determined by these first three points.

Problem 24. Given one complete projection, and three points in

the other projection of a plane polygon, to complete the projection.

First Analysis. Lines which intersect, or are parallel, are

necessarily in a plane. Hence, by producing the sides of the
given complete projection until they intersect, or by drawing
which are parallel to some of its sides or
in this projection lines
which intersect the sides or each other, auxiliary lines are ob-
tained by means of which the second projection can be built up.
In particular, if the figure is a quadrilateral, the intersection
of its diagonals is a point in the plane of the figure.

Fig. 228. Fig. 229.

Second Analysis. Both projections of three points are

known. Find the traces of the plane containing these points.
For the remaining points, one projection of each point, and
the traces of the plane containing it, are known; hence the
second projection can be found.
XV, § 142] PROBLEMS OF REVOLUTION 149

Construction by First Analysis (Fig. 228). Let the S^projec-

tion, «''6*c*d*, and a^b^c" of the F-projection be given. Since
this figure is a quadrilateral, we may draw the diagonals a''c''

and ft'-d*, intersecting in the point e*. In the F-projection

draw Wc". Locate e" on this line by projecting from e*. Draw
6"e", produce it, and locate on it d' by projecting from d*.

Otherwise (Fig. 229), through draw d*/* parallel to b''c\

ci!*

and intersecting a*6» at /*. Project from /* to /" in a^b".

Through /" draw fd' parallel to 6"c". Then the line df, since
it passes through the point / in ab, and is parallel to be, lies in

the plane of the quadrilateral. Locate d" by projecting from d*,

A second example is given in Fig. 230. Let the complete
F-projection, a-'^'cV-'e", and the //-projection of three points.

Fig. 230.

a*, 6*, and c*, be given. In this polygon, d'C and d^e" can both
be produced to meet a^b" produced in the accessible points j"
and Jc° respectively. Produce and project J" and k" on it.
a'S*,
Draw J*c*. This line produced contains d*, which is found by

projection from d". The point d* being thus located, draw d^A;*,
and project e* from e". Draw e*a'', completing the polygon.
These constructions are given merely as illustrations of the
150 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XV, § 142

method. Other constructions should suggest themselves to

the student. There is often a chance for the exercise of con-
siderable ingenuity in solving problems in this manner, espe-
cially in the matter of obtaining accuracy in the result. Note
that the ground line is not essential in these constructions.
Construction by Second Analysis (Fig. 231). Let the complete
F-projection, a''&"c''d''e'', and three points, a*, &*, and c", of the
Zf-projection be given. By producing the lines ab and be,

obtain the plane X, containing these two intersecting lines

(Prob. 6, § 106). Points d and e lie in this plane, and d" and
and e" are known ; find d* and e' (Prob. 16, § 133). Connect
c*d*, d'e*, e*a*.

Fig. 231.

CoKOLLAEY 1. To find the true size and shape of a plane

polygon.
First Analysis. Find one trace of the plane containing the
XV, § 142] PROBLEMS OF REVOLUTION 151

polygon. Revolve the polygon about this trace into the corre-
sponding coordinate plane.
Second Analysis. If any side of the polygon is parallel to
one of the coordinate planes, the polygon may be revolved
about this line as an axis into a position parallel to this coor-
dinate plane.
Construction by First Analysis (Fig. 231). Each corner of
the polygon is here revolved about VX into V (Prob. 21,
Working Rule, § 138), due regard being had to the relative
positions of the points with respect to the axis VX.
Check. Note that, for each side of the polygon, the F-pro-
jection and the revolved position (produced if necessary)
must intersect VX at the same point, namely, the F-trace of
this line.
Constructionby Second Analysis (Fig. 230). In this polygon,
the line ab parallel to H.
is Hence the polygon may be re-
volved about a^S* into a position parallel to H. Revolve first
the point d. To do this, through d* draw a line perpendicular
to a''b\ Obtain the true length of the line dj (Prob. 3, § 78).
In this case d'j" is the true length, since dj is parallel to V
With J* as center, radius equal to the true length of dj, strike
an arc across the perpendicular from d*, thus obtaining d,.
From d^ draw to the fixed points J* and fc* on the axis a'S*.
Obtain c, on dj*, and e^ on by drawing from c' and e* per-
djc'',

pendicular to a'?)''. Then since a* and &* are fixed points, the
true size of the polygon is a'6'c^d^e^.

CoEOLLAEY 2. To find
the projection of the line which bisects
one of the interior angles of a plane polygon.
Construction. In Fig. 231 the interior angle at e is bisected.
The bisector is first drawn in the revolved position, and inter-
sects the side 6,c, in the point Project from /, perpen-
/,.

dicTilar to VX to f" in b'C. and from /" perpendicular to GL

to/' in 6'c* ; then e"/" and e*/* are the projections required.
In Fig. 230, the interior angle at b is bisected, the actual
bisector, 6*/, intersecting d,e, in the point /,,. From /, are
obtained /* and /", giving 6*/* and b'f as the required pro-
jections.
 CHAPTEE XVI
MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE

143. The Distance from a Point to a Line. The shortest dis-

tance from a point to a given straight line is obtaiaed by
dropping a perpendicular from the point to the line. This
perpendicular evidentlylies in the plane which is determined

by the given point and line.

Problem 25. To find the shortest {perpendicular) distance from

a point to a line.

Analysis. In the general position of the line, the right angle

between and the perpendicular will not project as such
it

(§ 109). Hence, pass an auxiliary plane through the given

liae and point. Revolve this plane into either coordinate

Fig. 232.

plane, obtaining thus the true relative position of the line and
point. Draw the required perpendicular in the revolved posi-
tion. To find the projections of the perpendicular, revolve
the auxiliary plane back to its original position.
152
 ;

XVI. § 143] PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE 153

Construction (Fig. 232). Let A be the given line, and c the

given point. Through c draw the auxiliary line B{B'', B")
parallel to ^(§93). Pass the auxiliary plane through the X
lines A and B (Prob. 6, § 106). Since is introduced solely X
for the purpose of obtaining a revolved position, but one trace,
as HX, is necessary (§ 139). Eevolve A and c about HX into
H. To do this most readily, revolve point c to c, (Prob. 21,
Working Eule, § 138) draw B, through c, and the trace Sj
;

(Prob. 21, Corollary, § 138), then draw A, through the trace s,

and parallel to B^. From c, drop the perpendicular c,d, to A^
this is the actual shortest distance required. To find the pro-
jections of the perpendicular cd, revolve back from d,. perpen-
dicular to HX, and find d' in A'^ ; draw c*d'. Project from d*
to d" in A",and draw Cd".
Special Case I. The given line is parallel to one of the
coordinate planes (Fig. 233). Let the given line A be parallel
to H, and let c be the given point. It is required to draw from

c a line which shall be perpendicular to the given line A. Now

if two lines are at right angles, the right angle will project as
such if one of the lines is parallel to a coordinate plane (§ 110).
Since A is parallel to H, draw c^d* perpendicular to A^, giving
at once the .ff-projeetion of the perpendicular from c to A.
Project from d* to d" in A" ;
draw c'd". For the actual dis-

tance from the point to the line, find the true length of cd
(Prob. 3, §80).
154 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVI, § 143

The above solution suggests a method for solving the general

case, since any line can be converted into a F-parallel by as-
suming a secondary plane of projection parallel to the B'-pro-
jection of the line (§ 70). This is illustrated in Fig. 234.
In that figure, ah is the given line, c the given point, and a
secondary projection is made after assumiag QiL^ parallel to

Fig. 234. Fig. 235.

a*6*. Further explanation of the construction is omitted,

since, for the line in question, the solution is of doubtful ad-
vantage as compared with the general solution.
If, however, the given line is a profile line, the simplest solu-
tion isobtained by the use of an additional projection.
Special Case II. The given line lies in a profile plane.
Let ab, Fig. 235, be the given line, and c the given point. Find
the profile projection, «"&", of the line ah. Project c on to P,
and find the profile projection c". From c" draw, perpendicu-
lar to a^fi", the profile projection, c^d", of the required perpen-
dicular. From d^find the projections d" and d* ; then c'd' and
c'd" are the required projections. The true length of cd (Prob.
3, § 80) is the required shortest distance.
XVI, § 144] PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE 155

144. Distance between Two Lines. If two lines are not in the
same plane, that is, neither intersect nor are parallel, there is

but one line that is perpendicular to both of them. This line,

the common perpendicular, measures the shortest distance be-
tween the two given lines.

Problem 26. To find the shortest distance between two lines not
in the same plane, and the projections of their common perpendicular.

Analysis (Eig. 236). Let A and B be the given lines,

in any oblique position in space. Through either given line,
as A, pass an auxiliary plane Q, parallel to the other given
liae B. Then B
is everywhere equally distant from Q, and

Fig. 236.

this distance is equal to the shortest distance between B

and A. Assume any point, e, in B; from e drop a perpen-
dicular to the plane Q, intersecting Q at the point h. Note
that although this first perpendicular ek is not in the required
position, it does have the required direction.Now let the
perpendicular ek be moved, parallel to itself, so that the
point e moves in the line B. The point k will move in the
plane Q, describing in this plane a line L, parallel to B.
Since A is also in Q, and since L is not parallel to . A because
B is and A will intersect in a point, n. Let the per-
not, L
pendicular ek come to rest when point k coincides with point n.
The line will then be in the position on, intersecting both A
and B and perpendicular to each. Hence on is the common
perpendicular required. The actual distance between the
lines A and B may be found by measuring the length of
either ek or on.
 ;

156 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVI, § 144

Construction (Fig. 237). Let A and B be the given lines.

Through A pass the plane Q, parallel to B (Prob. 7, § 107).
To do assume any point, c, in A. Through c draw line D
this,
parallel to B. Pass the plane Q through the lines A and D.
Next assume any point e in B. From e draw the line F per-
pendicular to Q (§ 111). Fiud the point fc, in which F inter-
sects Q (Prob. 13, § 119). Here the auxiliary plane perpen- X
dicular to His used. Planes X
and Q intersect in the line J;
J" and F" intersect in k°, one projection of the required poiut k.

Fig. 237.

Let now the trial perpendicular ek be carried parallel to itself

to the position on. In this translation, point e moves along the
line B, and point k moves in the line L, parallel to B, to the
point n, where L intersects
A. Consider each projection sepa-
rately. In the IT-projection, through fc' draw i* parallel to B*
i/* intersects -4* at w* through n* draw w^o* parallel to e''J(^ to
;

intersect B* at o*. Make the analogous construction in the

F^projection. Thus n° and o" are determined independently
 ;

XVI, § 144] PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE 157

of w* and o*. But n'' and n' are two projections of tlie same point
likewise o* and o". Hence, as a check on the construction, w*
and w" should lie in the same projector, as should also o* and o".
The line no {n'^o^, n^o") is the required common perpendicular.
The shortest distance between the given lines is equal to the
true length of no (Prob. 3, § 80).
Special Case I. One of the given lines is parallel to H or
V. The general solution will apply to this case ;
but a partic-
\ilar solution, much simpler than the general one, can be had by
using a secondary plane of projection.
Let A and B, Fig. 238, be the given lines, the line A being
parallel to H. Assume a secondary ground line GiLi, perpen-

FiG. 238.

dicular to A''. Project the given lines A and B on the second-

ary vertical plane "F, thus assumed (§ 68). The line A will
project as a point, Ai". The required no is perpendicular
line
to both A and B. Since A is perpendicular to Vi, no, which is
perpendicular to A, is parallel to Vi- Again, since »(0 and B
are perpendicular, and no is parallel to Fl, the projection n{'o{'
and Bi" are perpendicular (§ 110). Hence, from Ai" draw
Wi'Oi"perpendicular to Bi". Project from Oi" on Bi' to o* on
5*, thence to o" on B". From o* draw o^n.* perpendicular to A''
(see Prob. 25, Special Case I, § 143). Project from ?i* to ti" in
A", and draw o^w". Then mW and n^o" are the projections of
the common perpendicular, while the actual shortest distance
is equal to mt'Oi".
168 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVI, § 144

Special Case II (Fig. 239). The given lines, ab and cd,

Project both lines on to the same profile
are both profile lines.
plane the plane here used is the
;

one containing the given line ab.

Eind the profile projections, a''b'
and Cd". Then it is evident that
the common perpendicular, ef, will
project on P as a point, located at
the intersection of Wb" and Cd".
The rest should be obvious.
Note. If one of the given lines is a
profile line, the other being a general
ohiique line, the general solution applies.
The simpler construction results when
the auxiliary plane Q is passed through
Fig. 239. the profile line.

145. The Angle between Two Planes. Let two planes inter-
sect so as to form a dihedral angle. The figure is left for the
student to draw. The angle between these planes is measured
by two lines, one in each plane, each perpendicular at the same
point to the line of intersection of the given planes. It is

evident that these two lines lie in a third plane which is per-
pendicular to both of the given planes and to their line of
intersection. They are, in fact, the lines of intersection of
this third plane with the given planes.
Problem 27. To find the angle between two planes.

First Analysis. Erom any point in space, drop a perpen-

dicular to each of the given planes.
The angle between these lines is
equal to the angle between the
planes.
Second Analysis. Let Q and R,
Eig. 240, be the given planes, and
let these planes intersect in the
line A. At any point c in A,
pass an auxiliary plane Z, perpendicular to A. The plane Z
intersects Q in the line cs^ and B in the line cs^. The angle
XVI, § 146] PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE 159

between csj and cs, is the required angle between Q and R.

Let A'' be the projection of A on H. Since Z is perpen-
dicular to A, A'' and HZ are perpendicular (§ 111). The
projection A'' and the trace HZ intersect in the point o con- ;

nect c and 0. Now co is perpendicular to A, since it lies in

the plane Z which is perpendicular to A. Also, co is perpen-
dicular to HZ, since it lies in the plane of the lines A and A'',
which is perpendicular to HZ. Revolve the plane Z about
HZ into H. Since co is perpendicular to HZ, c will revolve
with o as a center, and will fall on A'', because the latter is
also perpendicular to HZ, = co.
The lines
at the distance c^o
cs-iand cs.^ will take the revolved positions c^s^, and will
c^s^ and
show the true size of the angle 0, between them.
In actual construction there is little choice between the
first and the second analysis. Moreover, the latter usually
adapts itself better to the way in which the problem most
often occurs in practice. Hence the constructions here given
will be made in accordance with the second analysis.
Construction (Eig. 241). Let Q and It be the given planes.
Eind the line of intersection. A, of these planes (Prob. 12
§ 118). Assume an auxiliary
plane, Z, perpendicular to A,
by drawing HZ perpendicular
to A\ The F-trace, VZ, is
not needed (§ 139). The trace
HZ intersects J.* in the point
o, lying in H It is necessary
to find the shortest distance
from this point to the line A.
Assume a secondary ground
line,GiLi, coincident with A''.
Project the line A
as A^"
^"^- 2*^-
(§ 68), using the traces s and t

as the most convenient points in the line. Point o remains in

GiLi. Erom o draw oci'" perpendicular to A^' this is the shortest
;

distance from o to A. On A'', lay off oc, = oc^", thus obtaining c,.
Note the points Sg and Sg, in which HZ intersects HQ and HB
160 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVI, § 145

respectively. Draw c^^ EindThe angle between these

c^s^.

lines equals the required angle, between the given planes.

6,

Additional examples are given in Figs. 242 and 243. Each

of them falls under the general case, but they differ in the
method of finding the line of intersection of the planes.
In Fig. 242 the line A passes through the point s„ in
which HQ, HR, VQ and VM intersect. A second point is

^i- R is in

quadrants
Iand 3,
30° with H

Fig. 242. Fig. 243.

obtained by means of the auxiliary plane X (Prob. 12, Special

Case 5, § 118). The secondary projection Ai passes through
Si and the secondary projection of b.

Figure 243 is similar to Figure 242 in that the traces HQ, HR,
VQ, and VR intersect in a common point Si. A second point
b, in the line of intersection A, is here obtained by means of
the profile plane P (Prob. 12, Special Case 6, § 118), and the
secondary projection Ai" passes through Si and the secondary
projection, b^', of b. In other respects the constructions of
Figs. 242 and 243 follow that of Fig. 241.
Special Case I. The line of intersection of the given
planes is parallel to // or V. Let Q and R, Fig. 244, be the
given planes, with HQ and HR parallel. Then the line of in-
tersection, A, is parallel to H
(Prob. 12, Special Case 1,
§ 118). Pass the auxiliary plane .Z perpendicular to A. Since
XVI, § 146] PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE 161

A is parallel to if, the plane Z is perpendicular to TheJff.

line A intersects the plane Z ia the point c (c*, C) (Prob. 13,

Special Case, § 119). RevolYe the plane Z about HZ into //.
The revolved position, c,, is obtained simply by making the
distance from HZ to c, equal to the distance of c" from OL.
Then it is evident that the lines of intersection of Z with the
given planes Q and B will take the positions c^Si and 0,83, and

Fig. 244. Fig. 245.

the included angle, 0, between these lines is the angle between

the given planes.
Note. The student may discover that VZ, and also c, are superfluous
in this construction.

Special Case II. One of the given planes is parallel to

H or V. This case falls under the solution just given ; a still

simpler solution is shown in Eig. 245. The given plane B is

parallel to H. Therefore the angle between planes Q and B is
equal to the angle, 0, which Q makes with H, the latter angle

being found by Problem 18, § 136.

146. Application of the Preceding Problem. As instances in

which the angle between two planes is wanted in actual con-
struction, we may cite the case of two intersecting pitch (slop-
ing) roofs, or of two intersecting masonry walls with battered
(sloping) faces. The way in which the problem usually appears
is as a corollary to the following problem.
162 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVI, § 146

Problem 28. Given the horizontal traces of two planes, and the
angle each plane makes with H, to find the line of intersection of the
two planes.
Note. For the problem as stated, four results are possible, in general.
In addition to the above data, it will be assumed that the slopes of the
planes are known in order to limit the problem to one result. This would
be the case in the practical applications of the problem.

Analysis. One point in the line of intersection is located at

the intersection of the given traces of the planes. locate a To
second point, draw in each plane a line parallel to H, so that
these lines will intersect. The necessary and sufficient condi-
tion for their intersection is that these two lines shall be at the
same distance from H.
Let
Construction (Eig. 246). andHQ HR
be the given H-
traces. Let plane Q make the a-ngle «i with R, and B the angle
a2 with H. In any convenient position, draw a ground line,

OxLi, perpendicular to HQ, and draw the F-trace and edge

view, ViQ, of Q, making the given angle, «], with GiLy Draw
a second ground line, O-iL^, perpendicular to HB, and draw the
F-trace and edge view, V2R, of B, making the given angle, 02,
with GiL^. Assume any arbitrary distance, d. Draw the
XVI, § 146] PROBLEMS ON THE LINE AND PLANE 163

F-trace and edge view, Fi W, of a plane W, parallel to and H

at the distance d above H, also the F-trace and edge view, F2 W,
of this same plane, that is, draw Fi Wand F2 IF parallel respec-
tively to GiLi and 6^2-^2) and at the assumed distance d. The
planes Q and W
intersect in a line M, one projection of which
is the point. Mi", where Fi TFand ViQ intersect. Project from
Ml" and obtain M'', parallel to HQ. The planes B and in- W
tersect in a line N, a projection of which is the point JV2", where
F2 W
intersects Vili. Project from JVg" and obtain iV*, parallel
to HR. The projections M'' and JV" intersect in 6*, which is an
actual intersection in ^pace, since and M
are both in the N
plane W. This point is common to both Q and B. Hence the
^-projection. A'', of the required intersection of Q and B, is
drawn through &* and the intersection, s, of HQ and HB.
To locate the line A further, assume a thi?d ground line,
G3L3, coincident with A''. A F-projection, 63", of point b, is

located by making the distance from 63" to 6^3X3 equal to the

distance d, since this is the distance from H of any point in the
lines M and N. The projection, ^13", of A passes through 63"

and the point s. The line A is now definite, since we have its

iT-projection, A'', and the angle a^ (between Ai" and G3L3) which

this line makes with H.

CoKOLLAET. To find the angle between the given planes.
In finding the angle between two planes by Problem 27, the
construction already made in Pig. 246 is a part of the construc-
tion of that problem ; namely, the if-projection. A'', of the line
of intersection of the given plane, and the projection, Ag", of
this line, using a secondary ground line coincident with A''. To
complete the construction, draw, through any convenient point
o on A'', the trace SZ perpendicular to A''. Pind the perpen-
dicular distance, 0C3", from to A^'. Locate c, on A'' by making
the distance cfi equal to 003°. Prom c, draw to the intersections,
and S3, of HZ with HQ and HB respectively. The angle, 6,
8-2

between these lines is the required angle between the planes Q

and B.
 ;

CHAPTER XVII
COUNTER-REVOLUTION OF PLANES

147. Counter-revolution. A point, line, or any number of

lines lying in a plane may be revolved about one of the traces
of the plane into H or V. The basis for all such revolutions
is the revolution of a single poiat, given in Problem 21, § 138.
It has further been shown (see Prob. 22, Corollary, § 140
Prob. 24, Corollary 2, § 142 ; Prob. 25, § 143) that the revolved
position of a line lying in a plane can be given or assumed,
and the plane counter-revolved, that is, revolved back about its

trace so that the projections of the line can be found.

In all these solutions, however, the counter-revolution was
made depend upon a previous direct revolution of lines
to
already existing in the plane. We shall now take up the prob-
lem of a direct counter-revolution, starting only with the
revolved position of a point and the traces of the plane in ;

other words, the direct reverse of Problem 21, § 138.

Problem 29. Given the position of a point lying in a plane after

the plane has been revolved into H or V about the corresponding trace,
to find the projections of the point.

Analysis. Suppose the point a, lying in the plane Q, to have

been revolved about HQ
into H. The figure is left to the stu-
dent. The path of the revolving point is the arc of a circle,
which will project on If as a straight line perpendicular to
HQ, and on any plane perpendicular to HQ in its true shape
and size. Eeferring to the various solutions of Problem 21,
§ 138, it is seen that the solution given in Fig. 220 shows these

two projections of the path of the revolving point. The con-

struction of Pig. 220 may therefore be reversed to give the
solution of the present problem.
Construction (Pig. 247). The plane Q is given by its traces
HQ and VQ, and a, is given as the position of a poiat which
164
 .

XVII, § 147] COUNTER-REVOLUTION OF PLANES 165

has been revolved about HQ into H. Assume a secondary-

ground line OiL-y perpendicular to HQ. Assume a point, P,
in VQ; project to «* in OL. Find the secondary projection,
fi", of t, and through this point draw the trace and edge view
ViQ (§ 70). Project a, to G^Li. With o as center, revolve this

Fig. 247.

point to Oi" in ViQ. Then aj" is the secondary projection of

the point a. Project from a^" perpendicular to G-^Li, and from
a, perpendicular to HQ. Both of these lines must pass through
a*, which is thus determined. To find a", we now have given a*
as one projection of a point lying in the plane Q. Through a*
draw Jf* parallel to HQ ;
this is one projection of a horizontal
principal line of Q. The other projection, M", is parallel to
GL ; a" lies in M' (Prob. 16, § 133).

Check. The distance of a" from GL equals the distance of

Oi" from GiLi (§ 67).
A Second Result. The point a, thus found, lies above H.
The given revolved position may also be the revolved position
of a point b, lying below H. To obtain this result, after pro-
jecting from the given revolved position to GiLi, revolve about
o to 61", which lies in ViQ produced below GiLi. Then pro-
ceed as for the point a. As before, there is a check on the
construction the distance from b" to GL equals the distance
;

from 61" to GiLi.

166 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVII, § 147

Note. The student does not always see readily why the F-ptojections
a" and b' should be located by means of auxiliary lines in the plane Q,
since the distances of these points from GL appear at once in the second-
ary projection. Indeed, the projections a" and 6" can be located by trans-
ferring from the secondary projection the distances of ai" and bi' from
(riLi. But if. this method be employed, not only the distances, but the
directions of these points from GiLi must be considered, and there is a
chance for error. The method of locating a" and 6'' by means of the
M
auxiliary lines and JV" is free from this ambiguity.

In Fig. 248, the given revolved position, a„ is that of a point

which has been revolved about VQ into V. A secondary

/ /
/ /

/A
XVII, § 147] COUNTER-REVOLUTION OF PLANES 167

Since the edges of the square are luies lying in the plane Q,
the traces of these lines must lie in the traces of the plane
(§ 96). This fact furnishes a series of checks on the work, as,
for example, that 2,3^ and 2*3* intersect HQ
in the same point,

/ \ /'

Fig. 249.

namely, the IT-trace of this line, and that this trace projects to

OL in the point where 2"3" intersects GL.

Similarly, 1,4, and 1*4*, if produced, must intersect HQ in
the same point. In fact, the counter-revolution may be effected
largely by the use of the traces of the various lines, but at least
one point must be counter-revolved as in the general problem.
The counter-revolution of a plane figure is the reverse of
Problem 24, Corollary 1, § 142, and should be compared with it.
168 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVII, § 148

148. An Auxiliary Problem. As an application of the pre-

ceding corollary, we shall construct the projections of a right
prism or a pyramid resting on an inclined plane, using the
polygon which is located in the plane as the base of the solid ;

or, what will result in the same construction, we shall construct

the projections of a right prism or pyramid, the axis of which
is inclined to both H
and V. As, however, the axis of the
pyramid, or the long edges of the prism, will be a line or lines
perpendicular to the plane of the base, it will be necessary first
to solve the following problem.

Problem 30. At a given point in a plane, to draw a line which

shall he perpendicular to the plane and of given length.

First Analysis. A line perpendicular to a plane and indefi-

nite in length may be drawn by making the projections of the
line perpendicular to the traces of the plane (§ 112). Through
the given point draw a line perpendicular to the plane. Assume
a second point on this line. Find the true length of the line
between the assumed and given points. On this true length,
measure from the given point the length of line desired. Ob-
tain the projections of this line by reversing the construction
for finding the true length.

Fig. 250.

Construction by First Analysis (Fig. 260). Let a, lying in Q,

be the given point. Draw the line ac {aJ^d^, aV), indefinite in
length and perpendicular to Q. Assume a point c (c*, C) on
XVII, § 148] COUNTER-REVOLUTION OF PLANES 169

this line, and find the true length, aY/, of ac (Prob. 3, § 78).

Measure off a^b/ equal to the true length of the required line.
From b^' find the projections b" and b'' by reversing the con-
struction for finding the true length. Then 0*6* and a'b" are
the projections of a line of the given length.
Note. Any method of finding the true length of aic may be reversed,
all leading to the same point 6.

Any plane perpendicular to the given plane

Second Analysis.
be parallel to the required liae. Hence assume a secondary
"will

plane of projection perpendicular to either trace of the given

plane. Find the secondary projection of the given plane and
point on it. Since the required line is parallel to this plane of
projection, the secondary projection of the line may be drawn
at once, perpendicular to the secondary trace of the plane and
of the given length. From the secondary projection of the line
the projections on fi" and Fmay be found.
Construction by Second Analysis (Fig. 251). Let a, lying in
Q, be the given point. Assume GiLi perpendicular to HQ.

Fig. 25].

Project a to aj", and through this point draw the Fj-trace and
edge view, ViQ. Draw cti^Si" perpendicular to ViQ, and make
it equal to the given true length. Draw a^S* perpendicular to
HQ; locate 6* by projection from 61". Project from &* to &",
making the distance from 6" to GL equal to the distance from
61" to GiLi. Draw a'b". As a check, this should be perpen-
dicular to VQ. Then a^ft* and a^b" are the required projections.
170 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVII, § 149

149.Prism or Pyramid Whose Axis Is Inclined to Both H

A
and The method of obtaining the projections may best be
F.
shown by considering concrete examples.
Example 1. Draw of a right pyramid.
the projections
The axis is 1\" long,makes 45° with H
and 30° with V, and
slopes (from the apex of the pyramid) downward, backward, to
the right.
The base is a regular pentagon, inscribed in a circle of 1"
radius.
The lowest ed^e of the base is parallel to H. The center of
the base is f" a^bove H and 1" in front of V.

L" XN I HZ

Scale HaJf Size

FiQ. 252.

Construction (Fig. 252). The first step ia the construction

is to find the plane which contains the base of the pyramid.
The data for this plane are not given directly in the statement
of the problem. But, since the plane of the base of the
pyramid is perpendicular to its axis, we dexive at once, from
 '

XVII, § 149] COUNTER-REVOLUTION OF PLANES 171

the data given for the axis, that this plane makes the comple-
mentary angles, 45° with H
and 60° with V, and slopes down-
ward, forward, to the left. Construct the plane X, using these
angles and slope (Prob. 20, § 137).
We might next find a point, a, in this plane, distant f
above H
and 1" in front of V. To do this, draw the line L,
every point of which is so located that is, draw L" par- ;

allel to GL and f" above it, and L* parallel to and 1" in

front of OL. Find the point, a, where L pierces (Prob. 13, X
§ 119).
In the figure, however, ia order to render more clear the
subsequent steps of the construction, point c (c*, c") is located
at the given distances from H
and V, and through this point
the plane Q is passed parallel to (Prob. 9, § 107). X
Revolve c about HQ into H, obtaiuing c, (Prob. 21, § 138).
With c^ as center, draw a circle of 1" radius. Inscribe in this
circle the regular pentagon 1,2^3,4,5^, so located that the side
nearest HQ is parallel to it. This pentagon is the revolved
position of the base of the pyramid.
Assume a secondary ground liae, OiL^, perpendicular to HQ.
Projectc to Ci", and draw ViQ through Ci". Using the edge
view ViQ, counter-revolve the pentagon iato the plane Q
(Prob. 29, Corollary, § 147).

To obtain the apex of the pyramid, we must draw from c

a line 1|-" long and perpendicular to Q. Draw from c-^ the

line Ci'Oi", perpendicular to ViQ; make the length of this
line 1|".
Draw from c* perpendicular to HQ ;
project from o{' to o*
on this line.

Project from o* to making the distances of o" and Oi" from

o",

their respective ground

lines equal. Note as a check whether
o'c" is perpendicular to VQ. (Compare Fig. 251.)
Complete the projections of the pyramid, making visible
edges full, and invisible ones dotted.
In the figure, the projection of the entire pyramid on the
secondary plane of projection is completed, as well as the pro-
jections on H and V-
 .

172 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVII, § 149

Example 2. Draw the projections of a right prism, resting

with its lower base in a given plane Q. The pirism is If" long.
Tlie base is a square of 1" sides. The lowest corner of the base
is \" above H, |" in front of V. Two edges of the base make
equal angles with H and V, and slope downward, backward, to

the right.

Note. A plane, like W, Fig. 263, which has coincident traces parallel
to GL, will slope downward and backward, and will evidently make equal
angles, namely, 45°, with H
and V. Any line lying in such a plane will
make equal angles with and V. H
Construction. Let Q, Fig. 254, be the given plane on which
the base of the prism is to rest. Draw the line L (L", i*), ^"

Fig. 253.

above 11 and f " in front of V. Find the point in which the

line L intersects the plane Q This locates
(Prob. 13, § 119).
the point 1, Pass through the
the lowest corner of the base.
line L a plane sloping downward and backward, and making
45° with Hani V; since the line L is |-"' above //, the trace,
HW, is drawn ^" behind lA Find the line of intersection of
the planes Q and W. This is si, and is determined by the point
s, where HW intersects HQ, and the point 1 already found.
The line si in Q, makes equal angles with H and V, and
lies

slopes downward, backward, to the right. Hence si determines

one side of the base of the prism. Revolve si about HQ into
H to the position s'l, (Prob. 21, Corollary, § 138). With s^,
(produced) as one side, draw the square 1,2^3^4,., making each
side 1" long ; this square is the revolved position of the base
of the prism. Note that, since point 1 is to be the lowest corner,
no position of the square, other than that shown, is possible.
XVII, § 149] COUNTER-REVOLUTION OF PLANES 173

Assume OiL^ perpendicular to HQ; locate ViQ by means of

some point, as e, and counter-revolve the square (Prob. 29,
Corollary, § 147). As a check, note that the point 2 must fall
on the line si, produced, already determined.
The long edges of the prisih are lines If" long and perpen-
dicular to Q. Draw these lines, li'Si", 2i''6i"', etc., in the
secondary projection from this projection find the projections
;

on ^and V (Prob. 30, Second Analysis, § 148). Complete the

projections of the prism as shown.

Scale Half Size

'<^<^
Fig. 234.

An alternative method for finding the long edges of the

prism is also given in Fig. 254. From point 1 draw the line
(1*/*, 1°/") perpendicular to Q and of unknown length. Find
the true length l"/;. Make I'S^ the required length, 1|" ; from
5" and 6* (Prob. 30, First Analysis, § 148).
5i find the projections
The remaining long edges, 2-6, 3-7, and 4-8, may now be
drawn equal and parallel to 1-5.
 CHAPTER XVIII

TANGENT LINES AND PLANES — GENERAL PRINCIPLES

150. Curves. A curve may be defined as a line, no portion of
which is straight.
A plane curve is one which
wholly in a plane. If no
lies

part of the curve is is a space curve, or curve of

plane, the curve
three dimensions. Familiar examples of plane curves are circles
and ellipses. An example of a space curve is the helix, as
shown by a screw thread or a spiral spring. Space curves
result usually, though not necessarily, when two curved sur-
faces of any kind intersect each other.

151. Projections of Curves. The projection of a plane curve

on any plane of projection is, in general, a curve. If, however,
the plane of the curve perpendicular to the plane of projec-
is

tion, the projection of the curve is a straight line. The pro-

jection of a space curve on any plane is always a curve.
Conversely, if one projection of a curve is a straight line,
the curve is a plane curve. But if both projections of a curve
are curves, the actual curve may ormay not be a plane curve,
so that no general rule can be given.

152. Tangent Lines. At any poiat

in a curve, a straight line tangent to
the curve can be drawn. The pro-
jection on any plane of the curve
and its tangent are tangent to each
other. (See Pig. 265.) An excep-
tion occurs if the plane of projection
is perpendicular to the rectilinear
tangent, since the latter then pro-
Fig. 255. jects as a poLQt.
174
XVIII, § 154] TANGENT LINES AND PLANES 175

153. Tangents to Plane Curves. A

straight line tangent to a
plane curve lies in the plane of the curve.
Hence, if it is required to draw a straight line tangent to a
plane curve, from a point not on the curve, there is no solution
unless the given point lies in the plane of the curve. In other
words, a straight line tangent to a plane curve cannot be drawn
from a point in space which lies outside the plane of the curve.

Fio. 256. Fig. 257.

For example. Fig. 256 represents the projections of a plane

curve G (§ 151), and of two points a and h. A line tangent
to the curve C cannot be drawn from the point a, since it is
obvious that a is not in the plane of the curve. Why ? On
the other hand, the point h lies in the plane of the curve, and
from it two tangents (not shown in the figure) may be drawn
to the curve C.

154. Tangent Planes to Curved Surfaces. Let S, iFig. 257,

represent any curved surface. Let a be any point on the sur-
face, and let T be the tangent plane to the surface at the
point a.

Let C be any curve drawn on the surface through the point

a. If drawn C will probably be a space curve, al-
at random,
though it taken so as to be a plane curve. Let J be
may be
the line tangent to the curve C at the point a. Then J will
be tangent to the surface S, and will lie in the tangent plane
T. Let D be a second curve lying on S and passing through
176 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XVIII, § 154

a. Then a line K, taiigent to D at a, will also lie in the

plane T.
It follows that the tangent plane to a surface at a point on
it may be defined as the plane which contains all the straight
lines tangent to the given surface at the given point of the
surface.

155. Determination of Tangent Planes by Means of Tangent

Lines. Two intersecting straight lines determine a plane.
Suppose the given surface to be such that of known
two curves
properties can be drawn on the surface through the required
point of tangency. The tangent plane is then determined by
finding the plane which contains the two rectilinear tangents to
these curves. In general, the curves used will be plane curves.
is such that a straight line, as E, Pig. 257, can
If the surface
be drawn on the surface through the given point a, the line E
will lie in the tangent plane T. Such a straight line which
lieswholly on the surface is called a rectilinear element of the
surface. In this case, but one tangent line in addition to the
element E
is necessary to determine the plane T.

Curved surfaces exist in which two rectilinear elements of

the surface can bedrawn through a given point in the surface.
For such surfaces the tangent plane at any point is the plane
containing the two rectilinear elements passing through the
point.

156. The Normal. The normal to a surface at any point on

it is the straight line perpendicular
to the tangent plane at that point.
For certain curved surfaces, for
example, the sphere shown in Fig.
258, the normal can be determined
readily from known properties of
the surface. Hence the tangent
plane T at the point a can be found
by drawing first the normal N,
and then passing through the
point a the plane T perpendicular to the line N.
XVIII, § 157] TANGENT LINES AND PLANES 177

157. Determination of Tangent Planes by Means of the Normal.

It is to be noted that the tangent plane T is absolutely deter-
mined in space by means normal N, since but one plane
of the
can be passed through a given point a perpendicular to a given
line N. But in a projection drawing, where the plane T is
not determined until its traces HT
and VT are found, addi-
tional lines are necessary. This is shown in Fig. 259. The
point a represents the given point in
some given surface, and the line rep- N
resents the normal at that point. The
tangent plane T is passed through the
point a perpendicular to N. But al-
though the projections iV* and N" give
the directions of HT
and VT respec-
tively (§ 112), the normal alone fur-
nishes no point on either of these traces.
Hence at least one line, as J, lying in ^'G' 259.

the tangent plane, is required in the projection drawing to

supply a necessary point, as s. (See Prob. 10, § 115.)
In determining the traces of a tangent plane by the use of
the normal, therefore, the working method consists in finding,
in addition to the normal, one line which is tangent to the
given surface. The required tangent plane is then passed
through the tangent line perpendicular to the normal.
 CHAPTER XIX
TANGENT PLANES TO CONES AND CYLINDERS
158. The Cone and Cylinder. Definitions. The terms cone and
cylinder are variously used, both in mathematical and in popu-
lar language, to denote either surfaces, or solids bounded in
part by these surfaces.
As a surface, a cone may be defined as generated by a mov-
ing straight line, indefinite in extent, which always passes
through a fixed point in space, and is so guided, by a curved
line or otherwise, that a plane is not formed. A cylinder dif-
fers from a cone in that the generating straight line, instead
of passing through a fixed point, remains always parallel to
its initial position. In both of these surfaces, any position of
the generating straight line is known as a rectilinear element,

or simply as an element, of the surface.

The by the terms cone and cylinder are
solids understood
familiar and do not need to be defined here. It
objects,
should be remembered, however, that the axis of a cone or
cylinder is not necessarily at right angles to the base.

159. Representation of the Cone and the Cylinder. We shall

consider at present only the solid forms of these objects, and
shall confine ourselves to thosein- which the base is either a

circle an ellipse. The projections (0*, G") of a general

or
cone, in which the base is an ellipse, and the axis oblique to
the plane of the base, are given in Fig. 260.
We shall not attempt to solve probleins, however, when the
cone is projected as in Fig. 260. Since the base of the cone
is a plane curve, it can be projected as a straight line (§ 151).
In Fig. 260, let B
{HB, VB) be the plane of the base, found by
passing a plane through any three points of the curve (Prob.
6, Cor. II, § 106 ; construction not shown). Assume a second-
178
XIX, § 160] TANGENT PLANES 179

ary ground line perpendicular to HB ; then the plane B will

project edgewise as V^B (see Fig. 92, § 70). Consequently, in

Fig. 200.

the secondary projection, d", of the cone, the base will pro-
ject as a straight line.
Since this transformation always can be effected, we shall
discuss further only those cases of cones and cylinders in
which one projection, at least, of the base is a straight line.
This results when the plane of the base is perpendicular to,
or coincident with, one of the coordinate planes.

160. Projections of Cones and Cylinders. We shall place

these objects in the first or third quadrants only (see § 19).
Projections of cones are given in Figs. 261-265. These fig-
ures represent the following objects :

Fig. 261. Cone in quadrant; base in a plane per-

the third
pendicular to V; base visible. if we attempt to read
Note that
these as the projections of a cone in the first quadrant, the
base should be invisible. As this is not the case, the cone
cannot be in the first In this and similar cases,
quadrant.
the, student will often be expected to determine the quadrant
from the given visibility of the projection.
180 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 160

Fig. 262. Cone in the third quadrant; base in a plane per-

pendicular to H ; base invisible.

Fig. 2(31. Fig. 262.

Fig. 263. Cone in the first quadrant; base in H;

invisible.
Fig. 264. Cone 'in the third quadrant; base in V; base
visible.

Fig. 263. Fig. 264.

Fig. 265. Cone of revolution; base a circle in the P-plane.

While these are the projections resulting from projecting
 :

XIX, § 160] TANGENT PLANES 181

this object, so placed, they are, by themselves, and without

further information, ambiguous. They should be supple-
mented by the profile projection, and
the quadrant in which the object lies
must be indicated in some manner, as
for example, by lettering the vertex.
In projecting a cylinder, only one
base will, in general, be shown, the
cylinder being left indefinite in ex-
tent in one direction. Cylinders are
projected in Figs. 266-270, which rep-
resent the following objects
Eig. 266. Cylinder in the third quad-
rant ; hose in a plane perpendicular to
V ; base visible. As in the correspond-
ing case of the cone (Fig. 261), an Fig. 265.

attempt to read these views as the projections of a cylinder

in the first quadrant fails.

Fig. 267.

Fig. 267. Cyli^ider in the third quadrant; base in a plane

perpendicular to H; base invisible.
182 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 160

Fig. 268. Cylinder in the first quadrant; base in V; base

invisible.
Fig. 269. Cylinder in the third quadrant; base in H; base
visible. The elements of this cylinder are all parallel to V.

FiQ. 268. Fig. 269. Fig. 270.

Fig. 270. Cylinder of revolution; base a circle lying in P.

Like the cone of revolution (Fig. 265), these projections are
ambiguous, and similar re-
marks apply.
161. Projection of a Point in
the Surface of a Cone or Cylin-
der. Only one projection of
a point lying in a conical or
cylindrical surface can be as-
sumed. The other projection
of the point may be found
by means of an element of
the surface, as follows.
Let a cone be given as in
and let a" be an as-
Fig. 271,
sumed projection. The ele-
ment E, passing through a, Fig. 271.

must also pass through the vertex o. Hence draw H" through
a" and o". Produce E' to meet the F-pr ejection of the base
XIX, § 161] TANGENT PLANES 183

at c°. Project from c to & in

the if-projection of the base.
Then iJ* drawn by connect-
is

ing c* and Find a* in E''

0*.

by projecting from a". A

second result is possible, namely,
poiat 6 lying in the element F.
In general, an assumed pro-
jection will represent two points.
But let fc" be assumed in the
outside or contour element L.
Then Ti^ is the projection of
but one poiat in the surface.
A similar construction for the
cylinder is shown in Fig. 272,
the assumed projections being
the double point a'S", and the
Fig. 272.
single point ky.

In Fig. 273, the assumed projections are a*, fe*. The base
of the cone lies in P, which necessitates the use of the P-pro-
jection of the base. (Compare Fig. 265.) A similar construc-
tion applies to a cylinder whose base lies in P.
184 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

162. Tangent Planes to Cones and Cylinders. At every point

in the surface of a cone or cylinder, a plane tangent to the sur-
face can be drawn.
Planes tangent to cones and cylinders can also be passed to
fulfill certain other conditions. Thus, the tangent planes may
be required to contain a given point outside the surface, or
to be parallel to a given straight line.
In determining these tangent planes, we shall make use of
the following propositions.
(a) Through every point in the surface of a cone or cylinder,
a rectilinear element can be drawn, and this element will lie
in the tangent plane at that point (§ 155).
(6) It is a property of both the cone and cylinder that
a plane tangent at any point in a given element is tangent
at every point in the element. Hence, if the element of tan-
gency is known, a second line in the tangent plane may be
drawn tangent to the cone or cylinder at any point in this
element. A convenient point is generally the point in which
the element of tangency intersects the base.
(c) If the base of a cone or cylinder lies in H, any line tan-
gent to the base lies in H (§ 153), and thus becomes the H-
trace of a plane tangent to the surface. Similarly if the base
lies in For P.
(d) Every plane tangent to a cone contains the vertex.

Problem 31. To pass a plane tangent to a cone at a given point

in the surface.

Analysis. The plane is determined by the element which

passes through the given point, and a line tangent to the base
at the point where this element intersects the base (§§ 155,
162, b).

Construction. Case I. The base of the cone lies in H or V.

Example 1 (Fig. 274). The base of this cone lies in H.
Let a (a*, a"), lying in the element E (£?*, E") be the given point
in the surface. Since the required tangent plane contains the
element E, find the traces Sj and fj of E. Then the ff-trace,
HQ, of the tangent plane passes through Sj, and is determined
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 185

by the fact that HQ must be tangent to the base of the cone

(§ 162, c). The trace VQ is now determined, since it must
pass through t^ and the point in which HQ intersects OL.
Let it also be required to find the tangent plane at the point

6, lying in the element F. The ^-trace, HT, of this plane,

Fig. 274.

passes through the H-tva,G&, Sg, of F, and is tangent to the base

of the cone. The VT, passes through the V-trace of F,

F-trace,
but this point is inaccessible. Recourse must be had to some
auxiliary line lying in the plane T, and so situated that its
F-trace is accessible. (See § 108.) As HT
is known, a hori-

zontal principal line of the plane may be drawn through any

point of the line F (§ 108, Ex. 3). A convenient point is the
given point Through V draw Zr* parallel to HT; through
b.

&" draw L" parallel to OL. Then the line L lies in the plane
T, and the F-trace, t2, of i is a point in VT.
Example 2 (Fig. 276). The base of this cone lies in F.
Tangent planes are passed at the points a and h. For the
186 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

plane Q, tangent at a, the trace VQ is drawn tangent to the

base of the cone through the F-trace of the element E. Since
the H-trace of the element E
is not available, a point on is HQ
found by means of the auxiliary line L, a vertical priacipal

Fig. 275.

line of Q, drawn through the given point o. The H-tr&ce of L

lies in HQ.
The plane T is tangent at the point b. The trace VT is
drawn tangent to the base of the cone, through the F-trace of
the element F passing through b. In this case VT does not
intersect GL within reach, neither is the i?-trace of F obtain-
able. Hence two points on HT must be obtained by the use of
auxiliary lines. Two convenient lines are the vertical principal
lines, M and JV, of T, drawn, one through the given point 6,

the other through the vertex, o, of the cone, since the vertex is

in every tangent plane (§ 162, d). The fi-traces, s^ and s^, of

these two lines determine HT.
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 187

Case II. Tlie base of the cone lies in P (Fig. 276). The base
of this cone is and the cone is the symmetric form
a circle,
known as the cone of revolution. Let a (a*, a") be the given
point. Point a lies in the element E, which intersects the
plane of the base in the point c, the profile trace of the line.

Fig. 276.

Through the actual trace c" draw the profile trace, PQ, of the
tangent plane, tangent to the profile projection of the base.
Erom PQ are found the points, «2 on VQ, and Sj on HQ (§ 60).
Since E lies in Q, find also, if possible, the H- and F-traces
of E. In this case the F-trace, t^, may be found, and this is

sufBcient ; for VQ passes through t^ and ti, and HQ through

S2 and the point in which VQ intersects OL.
The plane T is tangent at the point h, lying in the element F.
This element intersects the base at d. The profile trace, PT, is
drawn through dP tangent to the base. From PT are obtained
the points Sj on BTand t^ on VT. Neither the H- nor F-trace of
jPis accessible, so that an auxiliary line is necessary. Since
the vertex of the cone, o, is in every tangent plane (§ 162, d),
188 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

let an auxiliary profile plane, X, be passed through o. Since

X is parallel to P, it will intersect the plane T in a line,
i,
parallel to PT. Project o to the plane P, and find the profile
projection, Through o'' draw the P-projection, L", of the
o".

PT. Find the traces of L first on P, then

line L, parallel to ;

by projection to X, giving the if-trace, S4, and the F-trace, ^4.

The traces HT
and VT are now
determined, since
we have two
points on each.
Case III. The
base of the cone
does not lie in H,
V, or P. In this,
the general case
of this and the
succeeding prob-
lems, one pro-
jection of the
base will always
be taken as a
straight line.

Fig. 276 (repeated). (See § 159.) The

base of the given
cone. Fig. 277, lies in a plane perpendicular to and oblique H
to V. Let a be the given point of tangency. This point
lies in the element E, which intersects the base in the point c.

The plane tangent at a is also tangent at c hence through c

;

draw the line J, tangent to the base of the cone (§ 162, 6).
The required tangent plane, Q, is now determined by the lines
E and J. In this case a sufficient number of the traces of E
and J may be found to determine the traces HQ and VQ (Prob.
6, § 106).
The plane tangent at the point b will contain the element F
passing through b. Line Fintersects the ba.se at d. Through
d draw the line K tangent to the base then
; ^ is a second line
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 189

in the tangent plane at 6

(§ 162, b). But in attempting to pass
a plane through F
and K, only the traces, S3 and ij, of K
can be found neither trace of
; F
is available. Therefore,
choose any point in F; a, convenient point is the vertex, 0.

Fig. 277.

Through draw the auxiliary line L, parallel to K; then L

lies in the plane ofF and JT (§ 108, Ex. 1). Line L supplies
the traces s^ and t^. These, taken in connection with the traces
of K, are sufficient to locate the traces, HT and VT, of the
required tangent plane.

Problem 32. To pass a plane tangent to a cone through a given

point without the surface. (Two results.)
Analysis. Pass a line through the given point and the
vertex of the cone. Find the point in which this line pierces
the plane of the base of the cone. From this piercing point,
draw a line tangent to the base of the cone. The required
tangent plane determined by the tangent line and the line
is

first drawn. In general, two tangents may be drawn to the

base, giving two possible tangent planes.
To prove this analysis, note that the vertex of the cone lies
in every tangent plane (§ 162, d). Hence the line first drawn
must lie in the required tangent plane. A tangent to the base
 190 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

which intersects this line must also lie in the required tangent
plane. But a line tangent to the base must lie in the plane of
the base, hence it can be drawn only from that point of the
first line in which it intersects the plane of the base (§ 153).
If the base of the cone lies in H, the point in which the line
, connecting the given point with the vertex pierces the plane of
the base becomes the ^-trace of this line, while the tangent

Fig. 278.

drawn from this trace becomes the Zf-trace of the tangent

plane (§ 162, c). The construction is similar if the base
lies in V.

Construction. Case I. The base of the cone lies in H or V

(Fig. 278). The base of the cone here given lies in V, and a
(a*, a") is the given point. Draw the line B (B'*, B"), connect-
ing a and the vertex Find the traces, s and t, of B. Since
o.

the base of .the cone lies in V, draw VQ tangent to the base

from the F-trace, t, of B. The trace HQ passes through the
H-trace, s, of B (§ 98). A second tangent plane T {HT, VT)
is similarly obtained.
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 191

Case II. The base of the cone does not lie in H or V

(Fig. 279). The base of the cone here given lies in the plane
X, perpendicular to V. The given point is a. Draw the line
B, connecting a with the vertex of the cone. Find the point,
c, in which B pierces X. (See Eig. 178, § 119.) Erom c draw

Fig. 279.

the line J (J*, J") tangent to the base of the cone. The
required tangent plane, Q, may now be passed through the
lines B
and J (Prob. 6, § 106). Eor this plane no auxiliary-
lines are needed. Draw also from c the tangent line K
{K'^, -ST"). Then a second tangent plane is determined by the
linesB and K. Eor this plane, the If-trace, HT, is deter-
mined by the traces, Si and S3, of B
and K, respectively. One
point of VT is ig, the F-trace of K. A second point is t^,
which is found by using the auxiliary line L, drawn through
the vertex of the cone parallel to HT (§ 108, Ex. 3).
192 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

Problem 33. To pass a plane tangent to a cone parallel to a

given line. {Two results.)

Analysis. The required tangent plane must contain the ver-

tex of the cone (§ 162, d). Moreover, since it is to be parallel
to a given line, the plane must contain a line parallel to the
given line (§ 105). Hence, through the vertex of the cone

pass a line parallel to the given line. Pass the required

tangent planes through this line. For the method of accom-
plishing this, see the preceding Problem.
Construction. Case I. The base of the cone lies in H or V
(Fig. 280). The base of the given cone lies in V. The given
line is A. Through the vertex, o, of the cone, draw B (£', B°)
parallel to A. The F-trace of B is ti. From ti draw VQ tsm-.
gent to the base of the cone. The trace HQ passes through
the ^-trace, Si, of B. For a second result, from ti draw VT
tangent to the base of the cone. Since VT does not intersect
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 193

GL within reach, an auxiliary line is needed to locate HT.

But VT is so nearly parallel to QL that the use of a vertical
principal line of T will not give an especially accurate con-
struction. Let us, then, note the point of tangency, <2) of VT
and the base. Through ti draw the element £(£", £*), the

Fig. 281

element of tangency, which must lie in the plane T. Hence

the ^-trace, s^, of E lies in HT, which is now determined by Sj
and the i7-trace, Sj, of B.

Case II. The base of the cone does not lie in H or V

(Fig. 281). The base of the given cone lies in the plane X,
perpendicular to V. The given line is A. Through the ver-
tex, 0, of the cone, draw B parallel to A. Line B intersects
the plane Xin the point c. Erom c draw the tangents, J" and
K, to the base of the cone. Plane Q is passed through B and
the tangent J, while plane T is passed through B and the tan-
gent K. No auxiliary lines are necessary. The planes Q and
T are the required tangent planes.
194 DESCEIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

Note. It will be seen in Figs. 280 and 281 that if the line B, parallel
to A, intersects the plane of the bases of the cone within the circumfer-
ence of the base, no tangent lines will be possible. Consequently, there
will be no solution. This will happen when the line A is parallel, or
nearly so, to the axis of the cone.
A special case, in which one, and only one, solution exists, will occur
when the line B, parallel to .4, is found to coincide with an element of
the given cone.

Problem 34. To pass a plane tangent to a q/linder at a given

point in the surface.

Analysis. As in the corresponding problem with the cone

(Prob. 31), the tangent plane is determined by the element

which passes through the given point, and a line tangent to the
base at the point where this element intersects the base.
Construction. Case I. The base of the cylinder lies in H orV
(Fig. 282). The construction is entirely similar to that for the
corresponding case of the cone (Prob. 31, Case I), and it should
not require an extended explanation.
The plane Q, tangent at the point a, contains the element E.
No auxiliary line is needed.
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 195

The plane T is tangent at the point 6, lying in the element

F. A necessary point, ^3, in VT, is here determined by the
auxiliary line L.
Case II. Tlie base of the cylinder lies in P
(Fig. 283). The
given cylinder is a cylinder of revolution, with a circular base
lying in P. Obtain, if not already given, the profile projection
of the base. For the plane Q, tangent at the point a, obtain
196 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY \X.IX, § 162

The required planes are Q, tangent at the point a, and T,

tangent at the point b.

Fig. 284.

Problem 35. To pass a plane tangent to a q/linder through a

given point without the surface. {Two results.)

Analysis. Through the given point pass a line parallel to
the elements of the cylinder. Since the required tangent
plane contains some element of the surface, this line must lie
in the required tangent plane. Find the point in which this
line pierces the plane of the base of the cylinder. Erom this
point draw a Pass the required tan-
line tangent to the base.
gent plane through the tangent line and the line first drawn.
In general, two tangent lines, and hence two tangent planes,
are possible.

Construction. Case I. 77ie base of the cylinder lies in H or

V (Fig. 285). The base of the given cylinder lies in H. The
given point is a. Through a draw the line B{B'', B") parallel
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 197

Fig. 285.

to the elements of the cylinder. From this on the construc-

tion is the same as for the corresponding case of the cone
(Prob. 32, Case I). The required planes are Q and T.
Case II. The base of the cylinder does not lie in H or V
(Fig. 286). The base of the given cylinder lies in the plane Z,
perpendicular to H. Through the given point a, draw the

FiQ. 286.
 ;

198 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XIX, § 162

line B parallel to the elements of the cylinder. Then proceed

as in the corresponding case of the cone (Prob. 32, Case II).
The resulting planes are Q and T.

Problem 36. To pass a plane tangent to a cylinder parallel to a

given line. {Two results.)

Analysis. No point of the required tangent plane is known

in advance, as in the corresponding problem with the cone
(Prob. 33) ; hence the result must be accomplished by indirect
methods. Through the given line, pass a plane parallel to the
elements of the cylinder. This is possible, since all the'
elements are parallel. This plane will then be parallel to

Fig. 287.

the required tangent planes, and may be moved, parallel to

itself, until tangent to the cylinder. The manner of accom-
plishing this is best shown in the construction.

Construction.Case I. The base of the cylinder lies in or H

V (Fig. 287).The base of the given cylinder lies in V.
The given line is A. Through A pass the plane parallel to X
the elements of the cylinder. To do this, assume any point, c,
in A through c draw the line B, parallel to the cylinder
;

pass the plane X

through the lines A and B, (See Prob. 7,
§ 107.) Since the base of the cylinder lies in V, VQ is now
XIX, § 162] TANGENT PLANES 199

drawn tangent to the base parallel to VX; HQ is then drawn

parallel to HX. The traces VT and HT of the second required
tangent plane are obtained in a similar manner.
Case II. The base of the cylinder lies in P (Fig. 288).
The base of the given cylinder is a circle whose center is o ;

find the P-projection of this circle. As in Case I, through the

given line A pass the plane X, parallel to the elements of the
cylinder. Since the base of the cylinder lies in P, find the
profile trace, PX, of this plane. Draw PQ and PT parallel to
PX, tangent to the base of the cylinder ; these are the profile

Fig. 288.

traces of the required tangent planes. From PQ and PT are

obtained the H- and F-traces of the planes, HQ and HT being
parallel to HX, while VQ and VT are parallel to VX.
Case III. TJie base of the cylinder does not lie in H, V, or P
(Fig. 289). The base of the given cylinder lies in the plane
Z, perpendicular to V. The given line is Through this
A.
line is passed, as in the previous cases, the plane X, parallel to
the elements of the cylinder. The next step is to draw a line,
J, which shall be tangent to the base of the cylinder and at
200 DESCRIPTIVE GfEOMETRY \XIX, § 162

the same time parallel to the plane X.

; This line must lie in

the plane, Z, of the base of the cylind.er,(§ 163) ; it must also

be parallel to some line in the plane X (§ 104) ; hence J will
be parallel to the line of intersection of the planes X and Z.
Find this line of intersection, L (Prob. 12, § 118). Draw the
line J tangent to the base of the cylinder parallel to the liue

Fig. 289.

L. Through J pass the required tangent plane, Q, parallel

toX
A second result, is found by means of the tangent
plane T,
line K, also Here VT is not located either by
parallel to L.
the F-trace of K
or the point where HT intersects GL. The
construction used is to assume some point, as e, on K. Through
e draw the line M, parallel to the elements of the cylinder.
Then the line M
lies in the plane T, and the F-trace t is a.
point on VT.
 CHAPTER XX
TANGENT PLANES TO DOUBLE CURVED SURFACES OF
REVOLUTION
163. Double Curved Surfaces of Revolution. A double curved
formed by the revolution of
surface of revolution is a surface
any curve about any straight line as an axis, provided the
resulting surface is such that no straight lines can be drawn
on it.
Pamiliar solids whose surfaces are double curved surfaces
of revolution are the sphere, the various ellipsoids, and the
torus (§ 26).

164. Representation of Double Curved Surfaces of Revolution.

In solving problems involving double curved surfaces of revo-
lution, we shall place the axis of the sur-
face perpendicular to one of the coordinate
planes. If not so given, the transforma-
tion can be effected by new planes of pro-
jection.
In Fig. 290 is shown a general case, a
vase whose outer surface isa double curved
surface of revolution. The axis is placed
perpendicular to H.

165. Meridians. The F-projection, Fig.

290, shows the true shape of the section
made by a plane containing the axis of the
surface. Such a section is called a meridian
section, or simply a meridian. Any plane Fig. 290.
which contains the axis is called a meridian
plane. All meridians are alike, and the surface is usually
considered as formed by the revolution of its meridian section.
201
202 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 165

The meridian which forms the outline of a projection of the

surface, in Fig. 290 the F-projection, is called the principal
meridian. The plane which contains this
meridian is called the principal meridian
plane. The principal meridian plane is al-

ways parallel to one of the coordinate

planes ; in Eig. 290 it is parallel to V.

166. Parallels. Let a double curved sur-

face be formed by the revolution of its

meridian about the axis. Each

section
point of the generating meridian describes
a circle lying in a plane perpendicular to
the axis (§ 74). These circles are called
parallels of the surface.
The projection of a double curved sur-
FiQ. 290 (repeated). face of revolution on a plane perpendicular
to its axis will consist of one or more cir-
cles,which are the projections of particular parallels of the
surface (§§ 75, 84). Eor example, see the fi'-projection of the
vase, Eig. 290.

167. Projections of a Point in a Double Curved Surface of Revo-

lution. Through every point of a double curved surface of
revolution a circle which is a parallel of the surface (§ 166) can
be drawn. A point will lie in the surface if its projections lie
in the corresponding projections of a parallel of the surface.
With the axis of the surface perpendicular to either or V, H
one projection of the parallel will be a circle, the other projec-
tion a straight line (§ 75).
Eor example, consider the ellipsoid shown in Eig. 291, where
the axis of the ellipsoid is perpendicular to H. Let a* be a
given projection of a point in the surface. Through a* draw
the fl'-projection, a circle, R'', of the parallel passing through a.

Eind the F-projection of the circle B, namely, the straight line

B". Project from a* to a" in B' then point a (a*, a") lies in
;

the surface. The given fl'-projection may also represent a

point b, lying on the symmetric parallel S (<S*, S^).
XX, § 168] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 203

Let c' be given.

This point lies on the parallel T, whose
F-projection, T", a straight line through c". The ^-projec-
is

tion of this parallel is the circle T*. In 2"" is found c* by pro-

jection from c". There is also a second result; namely, the
point d id", d^y
If a surface is wholly convex, as in this example, any point
assumed in either projection represents two points in the sur-

FiG. 291.

face, unless the assumed projection lies in the contour (outline)

of the surface. Thus, if e" is assumed in the ^projection, M",
of the principal meridian (§ 165), the single ^-projection, e*,

lies in the straight line Jlf*,which is the Zf-projection of the

principal meridian. If /* be assumed in the ^-projection, P*,
of the greatest parallel (§ 166), f" lies in the straight line P",
the F-projection of this parallel.

168. The Sphere. The sphere possesses the unique property

that every plane section is a circle. All planes which contain
204 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY CXX, § 168

the center of the sphere intersect the surface in circles of the

same size, known Any diameter of the sphere
as great circles.
may be taken as In the solution of problems involv-
its axis.

ing the sphere, advantage is usually taken of some or all of

these properties. The solution thus becomes a particular solu-
tion, and the sphere, in consequence, is not a good surface to
use to illustrate the general case of a double curved surface of
revolution.
In the problems of tangencies which follow, we shall treat
the sphere as a particular case, apart from the general problem.

Fig. 292. Fig. 293.

On account of the perfect symmetry of the sphere, and the

possibility of taking any diameter as an axis, students often
have more difficulty in visualizing the relation of points on the
surface than with a less symmetric surface. This difficulty
usually disappears by visualizing first a hemisphere, as shown
in Fig. 292. This figure represents the front half of a sphere,
bounded by the great circle 0{O', C*), and the portion of the
surface represented by each projection appears more clearly
than when the entire sphere is given, as in Pig. 293.

169. The Torus. The surface of a torus (Fig. 294) will

usually be taken to illustrate the general case of a surface of
revolution. This surface is divided by the circles and D
XX, § 170] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 205

iato two portions the so-called outer portion, doubly convex,

:

where a tangent plane contains but a single point of the sur-

face, and an inner portion, concavo-convex, where a tangent
plane at any point also intersects the surface.
Certain properties of this surface have already been given.
Thus in § 86, it has been shown that any plane perpendicular
to the axis between C and D cuts the surface in two circles A

Fio. 294.

and B, which are parallels of the surface. Hence, if the sur-

face is given as in Fig. 294, points assumed in the T^projection
may represent, according to their position, one, two, three, or
four points lying in the surface. A point assumed in the H-
projection, however, as in the ellipsoid. Fig. 291, can never
represent more than two points in the surface.

170. Tangent Planes to Double Curved Surfaces of Revolution.

(a) A plane tangent to a double curved surface of revolution

is tangent, in general, at but a single point. Exceptions occur,
however ; for example, in the torus. Fig. 294, the planes which
contain the circles C and D are tangent at every point in
these circles.
206 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 170

(b) Through every point in the surface two curves of known

properties can be drawn, namely, the meridian (§ 165) and
the parallel (§ 166) which pass through the given point.
(c) Planes which are tangent to points lying in the same
parallel of the surface intersect the axis at the same point.
(d) The normal (§ 166) at any point of the surface lies in
the meridian plane passing through the point.
(e) Every normal to the surface intersects the axis.

(/) Normals to points lying in the same parallel of the sur-

face intersect the axis at the same point.

Fig. 295.

Problem 37. To pass a plane tangent to a sphere at a given

point in the surface.

Analysis. Through the given point, draw two circles lying

in the surface. Draw tangent lines, one to each circle, at the
given point. Find the plane determined by the two tangent
lines. (See § 155.)
Let a (a'', a") be the given point.
Construction (Fig. 296).
Through a we can draw two circles which have simple projec-
XX, § 170] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 207

tions, namely the circle C (C", 0") parallel to Fand the circle
D (XI*, Z)«) parallel to H. Through a draw the line J (,/*, J")
tangent to the circle C, and line K
{E^, K") tangent to the
circle D (§ 162). The required tangent plane, T, is the plane
determined by the lines J and ^
(§§ 102, 106).
A second result is the plane Q which is tangent at the
point 6 (ft*, 6") and obtained in a similar manner.

Problem 38. To pass a plane tangent to a double curved surface

of revolution at a given point in the surface.

First Analysis. The meridian and the parallel which pass

through the given point are two known curves of the surface
(§ 170, 6). At the given point, draw tangent lines, one to
each of these curves. Find the plane determined by the two
tangent lines (§ 155).
Second Analysis.Draw the normal to the surface at the
given point. Pass the required tangent plane through the
point perpendicular to the normal (§ 156).
Third Analysis. Eevolve the surface about its own axis until
the given point is in the principal meridian plane. In this
position the tangent plane will show edgewise as a line tan-
gent to the outline of the surface at the given point. Counter-
revolve the surface together with the tangent plane to the
original position.
The actual construction, if made by the first analysis, must
often be supplemented by the use of auxiliary lines to obtain
points within the limits of the drawing. It has also been
shown, in § 156, that while the normal alone determines the
plane in space, auxiliary lines must be used to locate the
traces in the drawing. But by the third analysis, it is possible
in nearly every case to determine one trace of the tangent
plane neatly and rapidly. We shall therefore begin the
solution by the third analysis ; then, to find the second trace
of the plane, introduce as auxiliaries one or more of the
lines indicated by the first and second analyses.
Construction (Fig. 296). The surface chosen to illustrate
this, the general case, is that of a torus. Let a (a*, a") be the
208 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 170

given point in the surface. Revolve the torus about its axis
until a is in the principal meridian plane Y. The path of a
will be the parallel C, and the resulting position a, (a/, a/).
At o/ we can draw by inspection the edge view F2\ of the

Fig. 296.

tangent plane at this point. The fi'-trace of this plane is HTi.

Counter-revolving the torus to the first position, HT^ takes
the final positionHT (reverse of § 134). The tangent plane,
as shown at VT^, intersects the axis at the point / (/*, /*),
which becomes a fixed point for all planes tangent at any point
in the parallel C (§ 170, c). Hence, connecting / and a, we
XX, § 170] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 209

have the line K

(K\ /iT*), evidently tangent to the meridian E
and lying in the tangent plane at a. The vertical trace, VT,
of the required tangent plane is now determined by the V-
trace, ij of K, together with the point in which HT
intersects
OL. In this case the line ,7, tangent to the parallel G at a,
might be used instead of the line K.
Let 6 (6*, &"), Fig. 296, be a second point. Let 6 be revolved
into the principal meridian at 6, (&/, &/). At 6/ we may draw
by inspection the edge view FQi of the plane tangent at this
point. This edge view does not intersect the axis within
reach, aswas the case with point a; but the plane Qi inter-
sects H
in the ^-trace -ffQi- We can therefore obtain H.Q, by
revolving HQ,^ about the axis of the torus, as was done for
point a. The line L, tangent to D
at h, is one line in the
required tangent plane Q. This gives one point, t^, in FQ.
But since HQ, does not intersect GL within the figure, VQ, is
still undetermined.Let us try the normal. Draw first the
normal, JV,, This normal intersects the axis
at the point
6,".

at the point g". Then the normal at the point h passes through
g (§ 170, /). Connecting g" and 6" gives the F-projection, N'°.
Since the plane Q is perpendicular to the normal N, VQ is
now drawn through t^ perpendicular to N" (§ 112).
Where is the JJ-projection of the normal N? Note that
thisprojection would not be needed in any event, since it
would merely give the direction of HQ.
A second example, involving some additional features of
construction, is given in Fig. 297. The given point is so
chosen in the F-projection that it represents four points in
the surface (§ 169). Two tangent planes are shown, one at an
outside point, and one at an inside point. The plane Q is tan-
gent at point a. This point lies in the parallel H (E'', E"), so
that it revolves into the principal meridian plane at a, (a/, a,").

The trace HQ
obtained by revolving JHQi about the axis of
is

the torus, as in Fig. 296. The meridian tangent K, and the

line J tangent to the parallel E, give the F-traces ti and ij,

thus locating VQ. The normal, N, to the plane Q, although

not needed, is shown in the F-projection it here ; furnishes a
210 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 170

check on the construction, since N' should be perpendicular to

VQ a 112).
The plane T, Fig. 297, is tangent at the point c. This point
lies in the parallel F (i^*, F") ; hence it revolves into the prin-
cipal meridian at c, (c,'', c/). At c," draw the edge view, VTi,
of the tangent plane, also the normal, U„ to this plane. Then
HTi revolves to HT. Since FTi intersects the axis at 3", the
line M (M', JIf *) is a line in the required tangent plane at c.
But the line M gives no accessible point on VT; neither does
the line L, drawn tangent to the circle F at point c. Draw
the F-projection, U", of the normal to the plane T through 4°

and C (§ 170,/). Note that now but one point on VT is nec-

essary. Why ?
Since the line M
lies in the plane T, let the
point 5 be some assumed point on M. Through the
(5*, 5")

poiut 6 draw the liue X

(X\ X") parallel to the line L (§ 108,
Ex. 1). Find the F-trace, t^, of X. Draw the required trace,
VT, through ij perpendicular to U"-

171. Tangent Planes which Contain a Given Line. A plane

tangent to a double curved surface of revolution may, under
certain conditions, be determined by the fact that the plane
must contain a given straight line. For example, with sur-
faces like the sphere and the ellipsoids, it is evident that the
necessary condition is that the line shall not intersect the sur-
face ; two tangent planes are possible. But,
then, in general,
whatever the form of the surface, if a solution exists in space,
the traces of the plane can be found.
We are not prepared to take up at this time the general
case of a plane through any line tangent to any double curved
surface of revolution. The solution requires the use as an
auxiliary of a surface whose properties have not yet been dis-
cussed. Particular solutions can be found, however, for the
following cases.
(1) The given surface a sphere, the line general, in any
position not intersecting the sphere.
(2) Any double curved surface of revolution, with the line
in particular positions with respect to the axis of the surface.
XX, § 171] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 211

Fig. 297.
212 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 171

Problem 39. To pass a plane tangent to a sphere through a

given line without the surface.

Analysis. is shown pictorially in Pig. 298.

This analysis
Let A be the given and o the center of the given sphere.
liae,

Let Q and T represent the required tangent planes. Pass an

auxiliary plane, X, perpendicular to A, through the center of
the sphere. This plane intersects A in the point c. Since X
contains the center
of the sphere, the in-
tersection with the
sphere is a great cir-

cle. This circle evi-

dently contains the
points of tangency of
the planes Q and T.
From c draw the line
E tangent' to the
great circle. This
can be done, since c

and the circle are iu

the same plane, X
(§153). Then ^ will
lie wholly in. the tan-
gent plane Q, which
Fig. 298.
is now determined,

since we know two lines, A and E, lying ia it. The plane T is

similarly determined as the plane which contains the given
line A and the tangent line F.
An alternative method for determining the plane T is also
shown in Fig. 298. From
draw the line
o N
perpendicular to F.
This line lies in the plane X, and passes through the point of
tangency of F and the sphere. The line N
is thus the normal

to the tangent plane T. Hence T may be determined as the

plane which contains the given line A and is perpendicular to
N. We may observe in passing that it is not possible, in
general, to pass a plane through one line perpendicular to
XX, § 171] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 213

aaotlier line, but the relative positions of the lines A and N

are such in this case that it may be done.
Construction (Fig. 299). A be the given line, and o the
Let
center of the given sphere. Find the plane, X, which con-
tains o and is perpendicular to A (Prob. 10, § 115). Find the
poiat, c, in which A intersects X
(Prob. 13, § 119). Since the

Fig. 299.

plane X. oblique to both H and V, the great circle in which

is

X intersects the sphere will project as an ellipse in each view.

To avoid drawing these ellipses, revolve the plane about X
one of its traces into ox H (§ 138). F
Let be X
revolved
about B.X into H. The point c revolves to c, (Prob. 21,
Working Eule, § 138) and the point o revolves to o,.
; The
great circle lying inX will now appear in true shape and size,
214 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 171

and may be drawn at once, with o, as center. From c, draw

the two tangents, E, and F,, to this circle. These are two
lines lying in the plane X (see the Analysis), and their pro-
jections may be obtained by counter-revolving the plane X
(§ 147). The tangent E^ intersects HX at Sj*, whence s," is on

Fig. 299 (repeated).

OL, and the J^*, E" are determined by the fact

projections
that the line E passes
through the point c (reverse of Eig. 221,
§ 138). Pass the required tangent plane Q through the lines
E and A (Prob. 6, § 106).
The tangent line F does not intersect HX within reach. In-
stead of attempting to find the projections of F, let us deter-
mine the tangent plane by means of the normal. Through o,

draw N^ perpendicular to F^ The line N

lies in the plane X
XX, § 171] SURFACES OP REVOLUTION 216

(see the Analysis) hence the intersection of iV; and

; is the HX
^-trace of Using this trace and the point o, determine the
JV.

projections, iV* and N% of N. The required tangent plane T

contains A and is perpendicular to N. Let Sj and t^ be the
traces of A. Through s^ draw HT
perpendicular to N'';
through ^1 draw VT perpendicular to N" (§ 112).

Fig. 300.

Speciaii Case. The given line is parallel to H or V. Let the

given line A, Fig. 300, be parallel to H. Assume a secondary-
ground line, O^Li, perpendicular to A'^. The line A will then
project as a point, Ai" (§ 70). Project the center of the sphere
to Oi", and draw the sphere. The edge views, FiQ and V^T, of
the required tangent planes may now be drawn directly through
Ai". The plane Q (SQ, VQ) requires no further explanation.
The trace HT is readily obtained, but for VT an auxiliary line
is necessary. The line used here is B, parallel to the line A.
The projection Bi", a point, is assumed in Fi T. From Bi' are
obtained 5* and B°. The F-trace, t^, of B
locates a point ia VT.
216 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 171

Problem 40. To pass a plane tangent to a double curved surface

of revolution through a given line. {Special Cases.)

Case I. The given line intersects the axis of the surface.

Analysis. Using the point in which the given line intersects

Fig. 301.

the axis as a vertex, circumscribe the given surface by a cone

of revolution. Pass the required tangent planes through the
given line tangent to the auxiliary cone.
Construction (Pig. 301). The given surface is an oblate
spheroid, with its axis perpendicular to H. The given line A
intersects the axis at the point c (c*, C). Prom c" draw tan-
gents to the y-projeetion of the given surface ; these tangents
represent the auxiliary cone in the F^projeetion. The base of
this cone on H is the circle BK The /T-traces, HQ and HT, of
the required tangent planes pass through the J^T-trace, Sj, of A,
and are tangent to the circle B''. (Compare Prob. 32, § 162.)
XX, § 171] SURFACES OF REVOLUTION 217

The F-traces, VQ
and VT, pass tLrough the F-trace, «i, of A.
A. second point on VT is here obtained by finding the F-trace,
^2, of the element, E, in which the plane T is tangent to the
auxiliary cone.
Case II. The given line is parallel to the axis of the surface.
Analysis. The axis of the given surface being placed, as
usual, perpendicular to one of the coordinate planes, for ex-
ample H, the wUl be a point.
fi'-projection of the given line
The fi'-traces of wUl therefore be their edge
the tangent planes
views, and the planes may be drawn by inspection. "We pro-
ceed similarly if the axis of the surface is perpendicular to V
01 P.
No figure to illustrate the construction is deemed necessary.

Case III. Tlie given line is perpendicular to, but does not
intersect, the axis of the given surface.
Let the axis of the given surface be per-
First Analysis.
pendicular to H. Then the given line is parallel to H. Re-
volve the line about the axis of the surface until the line is
perpendicular to V, and projects as a point thereon. The edge
views of tangent planes may now be drawn by inspection.
Revolve these planes about the axis of the surface until they
contain the original position of the given line. We proceed
similarly if the axis of the surface is perpendicular to F or P.
Second Analysis. The given line may be projected as a point
by choosing a secondary plane of projection perpendicular to
the line.This plane necessarily will be parallel to the axis of
the given surface. Hence the surface may be projected readily,
and the edge views of the tangent planes may be drawn by
inspection. The traces of the planes can then be obtained
from the edge views.
Since the method of the second analysis necessitates the con-
struction of an additional projection of the given surface, it is
usually easier to employ the first analysis. The following con-
struction is made by the first analysis.
Construction (Fig. 302). The given surface is that of a solid
torus, only the outer (doubly-convex) portion of the curved
218 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XX, § 171

surface being retained. The axis of the surface is perpen-

dicular to V. The given line A (A", A'') is parallel to V. Re-
volve A about the axis of the torus to the position Ai (Ai",
Ai''), where the Zf-projection, Ai'', is a point. Through Ai

Fig. 302.

draw the tangent planes Qi (HQi, VQi) and 2\ (HTi, F7\). Re-
volve Qi and T^ about the axis of the torus to the positions
Q (VQ, HQ) and T ( VT, HT), so that each plane contains the
line A (§ 134). Then Q and T are the required tangent
planes.
 ; ;

CHAPTER XXI
THE INTERSECTION OF CURVED SURFACES BY PLANES
172. Classification of Curved Surfaces. Curved surfaces may
be divided into three classes :

(a) Ruled surfaces, on which a straight line, or rectilinear ele-

ment, can be drawn through any point of the surface
(6) Surfaces of revolution, on which a circle, lying in a plane
perpendicular to the axis, can be drawn through every point
of the surface
(c) All other curved surfaces, on which, in general, neither
straight lines nor circles can be drawn.
Certain surfaces, for example the cone and cylinder of
revolution, belong to both classes (a) and (6).

173. The Intersection of a Ruled Surface and a Plane. Select a

sufiicient number of the rectilinear elements of the surface.
Find the points in which these straight lines intersect the
given plane. These points lie in the required intersection.
In the process of finding where a straight line intersects a
plane, it is usual to pass through the line an auxiliary plane
perpendicular to or V.H (See Prob. 13, § 119.) Hence the
elements of the ruled surface are often chosen by passing
through the surface a series of planes perpendicular to or H
V, these same then used as auxiliaries for
planes being
finding the points in which the resulting elements intersect
the secant plane.

174. The Intersection of a Surface of Revolution and a Plane.

An auxiliary plane taken perpendicular to the axis of the
given surface will cut one or more circles from the surface,
and, in general, a straight line from the given plane. Points
of intersection, if any, of the straight line with the circle
or circles, will lie in the required intersection of the plane and
the surface.
219
220 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXI, § 174

In order that the circular sections of the given surface may

be projected readily, the axis of the surface should be perpen-
dicular to one of the coordinate planes. (Compare §§ 84, 86,
164.)

175. The Intersection of Any Curved Surface and a Plane. In

and a plane can be found
general, the intersection of a surface
by drawing on the given surface any series of curves which
are known to lie in the surface, and then finding the points in
which these curved lines intersect the given plane.
If the curves which can be drawn in the surface are plane
;

curves, the planes of these curves may be used as auxiliary

planes, and the process of finding the intersection is similar to
that for a surface of revolution.

Method by Means of Secondary Projections. Any plane

176.
may be seen edgewise by projecting on a suitable secondary
plane of projection (§ 70). A general method of finding the
intersection of any surface or solid with a plane is, therefore,
to make a secondary projection of the surface and the secant
plane so that the plane appears edgewise. This reduces one
projection of the required intersection to a straight line.
Since this method involves the construction of a new pro-
jection of the given surface, as well as of the secant plane, it

will be found of doubtful advantage in the case of surfaces

consisting of rectilinear elements. The method is, however, a
good one with surfaces of revolution, whose projections, from
any point of view perpendicular to the axis, are alike.

177. Visibility of the Curve of Intersection. In finding the

intersection of a plane with a curved surface or solid, the plane
will be considered to be transparent, and in general no portion
of the surface or solid will be removed. The various portions
of the resulting line of intersection, therefore, will be visible
or invisible, according as they lie in a visible or an invisible
portion of the .surface. (Compare § 85.)

178. A Rectilinear Tangent to the Curve of Intersection. At

any point in the iutersection of any curved surface and a
XXI, § 179] CURVED SURFACES AND PLANES 221

plane, a rectilinear tangent to the intersection may be drawn

without knowing or considering the properties of the curve of
intersection. Eor the tangent line must lie in each of two
planes first, in the given secant plane, since every tangent to
:

a plane curve lies in the plane of the curve (§ 153) and ;

second, in the plane tangent to the given surface at the

point in question (§ 154). Hence, if the plane tangent to the
surface at the given point can be found, the line of intersection
of this plane with the given, secant plane will be tangent to
the curve of intersection at' the given point.

179. Development. A curved surface is developable when it

can be unrolled into a plane, without extension, compression,
or distortion of any kind. Only surfaces which consist of
rectilinear elements are developable and of these surfaces,
;

only those forms in which every two consecutive elements lie

in the same plane, that is, either intersect or are parallel.
Cones and cylinders are developable, and are the only forms
of developable curved surfaces commonly used in practical
work.
 CHAPTER XXII
INTERSECTION OF PLANES WITH CONES AND
CYLINDERS

180. The Intersection of a Cone or Cylinder with a Plane. The

cone and the cylinder are ruled surfaces. Hence the method
of finding points in the intersection is that described in § 173.
In the three problems which follow, in addition to finding
the curve of intersectionwe shall draw a tangent line to some
point of the intersection (§ 178), and develop the curved sur-
face, showing the section and the tangent line.

Problem 41. To find the intersection of a cone and plane.

Case I. The base of the cone lies in H or V.
A. The Inteesbction.. Analysis. See § 173.

Construction (Fig. 303). The base of the given cone lies in

H. The given secant plane
is Q. Eight elements have been
chosen on the cone, distinguished by the numbers 1 to 8 around
the base. Find the points in which these elements intersect
the plane Q by passing through them auxiliary planes perpen-
dicular to jy or F
(Prob. 13, Usual Method, § 119). The
planes here chosen are the planes X, Y . . . N, perpendicular
to H. The intersection of planes X and Q is the line A.

The intersection of A' and the F-projection of the element

0-3 locates 13°, one point of the required intersection. The
intersection of planes Z and Q is the line C, the projection (7°

being parallel to FQ. Z

Since plane contains two elements of
the cone, the construction locates two points, 11 on element
0-1 and 15 on element 0-5. But the planes Y, M, and are N
so situated that in attempting to find their lines of intersection
with Q, only one point in each line can be found within- the
limits of the figure, namely, the points 6", d", and e" on the
ground line.
222
XXII, § 180] PLANE AND CONE 223

B. The Common Point. Since the planes X, Y, Z, M, and

N are perpendicular to H, itfollows that the lines of inter-

Fia. 303.

section A, B, C, etc., will have their IT-projections coincident

with HX, HY, HZ, etc., respectively. But the lines of inter-
224 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

section A, B, C, etc., are all lines in one plane, namely, the

plane Q. Now if a number known to be in the same
of lines
plane appear to intersect in a common point in one view, it
can only be because the lines actually intersect in space.
Hence in the other view the lines must also pass through a
common point. In the figure, the jy-projection of this point
is n*, while rV on A". The other Fiprojections, B', D",
lies

and E", may now be drawn through n" and the points 6", d",
and e" on GL, already determined. The intersections of jB",
D", and E' with the elements lying in the corresponding
auxiliary planes locate the remaining points in the curve of
intersection.
C. Visibility op the Cukve op Intersection. (See
§ 177.) In the If-projection, the point 11, on the highest
element, is evidently visible. This determines the visible side
of the curve, which will become invisible at the points 13
and 17, which lie on the boundaries of the visible surface of
the cone. Similarly, in the F^projection, the point 17, on the
extreme front element, is visible. The visible side of the
curve, beginning at 11, passes through 17 and ends at 15.
D. A Line Tangent at a Given Point in the Curve
OP Intersection. Analysis. See § 178.
Construction. Let 12, lying on the element 0-2, be the
given point. Eind the plane S {HS, F/S), which is tangent to
the cone at the poiat 12 (Prob. 31, § 162). Eind the intersec-
tion of S with the given plane Q (Prob. 12, § 118). This line
of intersection T (T'', T") is the required tangent line. As a
check, should pass through the point 12, and show tangent
it

to the curve of intersection in each projection (§ 152).

E. Development op the Curved Sukpace op the Gone.
Analysis. The entire curved surface, between the vertex and
the base, should be developed first. Any other line drawn on
the surface can then be put in. The conical surface is divided
by its elements into pieces bounded by two straight lines and
a curve. These pieces are approximately plane triangles, the
approximation being closer the nearer the elements are to-
gether. The curved surface may then be developed as if the
XXII, § 180] PLANE AND CONE 225

cone were a many-sided pyramid, the triangular faces being

built up from the true lengths of their sides. (See § 89.)

Fig. 303 (repeated).

Construction. -The given conical surface is divided into

eight triangular pieces by the chosen elements 0-1, 0-2 . . .
 226 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

0-8. The true lengths of the elements may be found by

the rule of § 88. The true lengths of 1-2, 2-3, etc. ap-
pear directly in the ^-projection of the base, the usual
approximation being that the chord equals the arc. As-
suming the true lengths found as needed, begin the develop-
ment by laying off, on any convenient line, O'-l' equal to
the true length of 0-1. With 0' and 1' as centers, radii
respectively the true lengths of 0-2 and 1-2, strike arcs inter-
secting at 2'. Working from 0' and 2', obtain 3' in a similar
manner, and so on. Draw a smooth curve through 1', 2' . . .

8', 1".

To locate the section 11, 12 18, 11 in the development,

. . .

note that 11' may be located by measuring from 0' the true
•
length of 0-11, or from 1' the true length of 1-11. By com-
paring Figs. 113 and 114, § 88, it will be seen that in this case
the true length of 1-11 is the more easily found. To con-
tinue, locate 12' from 2' by using the true length of 2-12, 13'
from 3' by the true length of 3-13, and so on. Draw a smooth
curve through the points 11', 12', 13' . . . 18', 11".

F. The Tangent Line in the Development. Analysis.

The tangent line at any point in the section makes a definite
angle with the element passing through that point. This
angle must appear in its true size in the development.
Construction. The line T intersects the element 0-2 at the
point 12, -and makes with it the angle 2-12-s. Let us con-
nect the point 2 on the element 0-2 with the fl'-trace, s, of the
tangent line T. The drawn, the If-projection,
line is already
2*-s*, being a portion of the If-trace, HS, of the tangent plane
at the point 2, while 2'-s'' lies in OL. We thus have found
a plane triangle, 2-12-s, one of whose angles is the required
angle 2-12-s. Points 2 and 12 are already in the develop-
ment at 2' and 12', respectively. Find the true lengths of
12-s and 2-s. Using 12' and 2' as centers, strike arcs inter-

secting at s'. Then 2'-12'-s' is the true size of the angle

2-12-s. Consequently s'-12' is the required development, 7",
of the tangent line T. As a check, it should be tangent to the
curve ll'-12'-13'. Incidentally, since the line s'-2' is the
XXII, § 180] PLANE AND CONE 227

development of a line tangent to the base, s'-2' is tangent to

the curve l'-2'-3'.

Fio. 303 (repeated).

It is geometrically possible to lay off the triangle 2'-.12'-s'

on the other side of 2-12'. But by visualization of the posi-
228 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

^y
-»^
XXII, §180] PLANE AND CONE 229

tion of the point s relative to tlie cone, as shown especially in

the IT-projection (s on the side of element 0-2 away from 0-1)
itwUl be seen that the position of s' as given in the develop-
ment is the only one which represents the point.
The remaining cases of this problem differ in details of con-
struction, but do not differ in essential principles, from the
first case. They will therefore not be taken up so fully, but
all important variations will be noted.
Case II. The base of the cone lies in P.
Construction (Fig. 304). The given cone is one of revolution
lying in the third quadrant. The given secant plane is Q.
Eight elements have been chosen, equally spaced on the P-pro-
jection of the base.
The points in which the chosen elements intersect the plane
Q are found by means of auxiliary planes perpendicular to H.
The plane X, passed through the element 0-3, intersects Q in
in the line C, the F-projection C" being parallel to VQ. The
Fprojection, w", of the common point is found where G" inter-
sects the projector o'^o". The remaining lines of iatersection
are drawn through n" and the points a", b", d", e", on QL. As
soon as these lines are drawn, it is seen that some of the points
of the intersection lie beyond the limits of the cone.
To Find the Points wheke the Curve op Inteesection
Leaves the Base. Find the profile trace, PQ, of Q (§ 60).
Since thisis a line in the plane of the base, the intersections

of PQ with the profile view of the base, namely lO*" and 20'',
are the profile projections of two points ia the cuEve of
intersection.
The line T is tangent to the intersection at point 14. This
line is the intersection of the given plane Q with the plane S,
the latter being passed tangent to the cone at the point 14.
The development, 0'-l'-2'^3' 8'-l"-0', of the entire
. . .

curved surface is the sector of a circle, since all the elements

are of the same true length. The lengths l'-2', 2'-3', etc., are
equal to Such a point as 13' may be located
l''-2'', 2''-3'', etc.

equally well by making 3-13' equal to the true length of

3-13, or by making 0'-13' equal to the true length of 0-13,,
230 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

The point 19' found by making 2'-19' equal to 2''-19''. The

is

poiat 20' is found by making 6'-20' equal to 6''-20''.

To develop the tangent line T, connect some poiat on T
with some poiat on the element 0-4, thus forming a triangle.
The points chosen are the F-trace, t, of T, and the extrem-
ity, 4, of the element. The triangle 4-14-f is then plotted ia
the development at 4'-14'-«', by using the true length of its
sides. Then t'-14' is the development of T, and is tangent to
13'_14'-15'.
But since t-A was not tangent to the base, the development
tf^' will not be tangent to 3'-4'-5'.
Case III. The base of the cone does not lie in H, V, or P.
Construction (Fig. 305). The method of finding points in
the intersection does not differ from that previously explained.
We may note, however, that the auxiliary planes are taken
here perpendicular to V. Consequently the F-p rejection n" of
the common point coincides with o", while m* is found on the
projector o'"o^.

The line T, tangent at the point 16, is the intersection of Q

with the plane R, tangent at poiat 16.
The development requires the true lengths of the elements,
and the true lengths of the segments 1-2, 2-3, etc., of the base.
Since neither end of any element lies in a coordinate plane, the
true lengths of the elements must be found by the method of
Fig. 113, § 88.
Thetrue size of the base does not appear in either projec-
tion, and must be found before the true lengths of its segments
become known.
The true size is found here by revolving about the diameter
I'-S", which is parallel to F Then the true size is shown by
the points 2,, 3„ etc. Therefore, in the development, l'-2'
equals l''-2„ 2'-3' equals 2,-3„ etc.
The developed tangent is obtained from the triangle 6-16-s,
the points 6 and s being chosen as convenient points on the
element and tangent line, respectively. The development T'
is tangent to 15'-16'-17', but the development s'-6' is not tan-
gent to 5'-6'-7'.
XXII, §180]
PLANE AND CONE
231

Fig. 305.
232 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

Problem 42. To find the intersection of the frustum of a cone and

a plane.

Analysis. See §§ 173, 177. The general principles involved

are the same as in the preceding problem.

Construction (Pig. 306). The given frustum is placed in the

first quadrant, with its lower base on H, its upper base parallel
to H. The given secant plane is Q.
A. To Locate the Elements. Contour elements like 1-11
and 4-14 are readily obtained by noting certain tangent points.
The arcs l*-4'' and 11*-14'' may then be divided in any equal
ratios by the points 2*, 3*, 12*, 13*, which will determine the
elements 2-12, 3-13. Or, we may note that the plane J, per-
pendicular to H, which contains the element 5-15, must also
contain the element 3-13.
The frustum in Fig. 306 has been specially chosen. It is'

not in general possible to project eight elements with so few

lines in each view.
B. The Auxiliary Line. Let us attempt to find the
points in which the eight chosen elements intersect the plane
Q, by passing through them planes perpendicular to H. Take
for example the plane X, containing the element 8-18. The
intersection of HX
and HQ locates one point, a, in the line of
intersection of these planes. A second point cannot be located
by the use of VX. A similar situation is found for the planes
Y, Z, etc. Even if some of the lines of intersection could be
,

found by means of the F-traces of the planes, it would not

assist in finding the other lines of intersection, since the com-
mon point of the preceding problem is not available. In this
had we begun by taking the auxiliary planes perpendicu-
case,
we would have been confronted by a similar situation.
lar to V,
The method given below is a general one, and may be used
when finding the intersection of any ruled surface with a
plane.
Let L (X*, L") be any arbitrarily chosen line lying in the
plane Q. For convenience, this line is usually taken as one of
the principal lines (§ 99) of the plane. Other conditions gov-
XXII, § 180] PLANE AND CONICAL FRUSTUM 233

Fig. 306.
234 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

erning the choice of the line L should be apparent after

observing the use which is made of it. The line L intersects
the plane X in the point x (see Fig. 178, § 119). But L lies in
the plane Q. Hence the point x lies in both the planes X and
The
Q, consequently is a point in their line of intersection, A.
Fiprojection, A",must therefore pass through a;" in i", and is
determined by a;" and the point a", previously noted in the
ground line. Similarly, the line L intersects the plane Y in
the point y, which must lie in the line of intersection of Y and
Q and; so on. The ^-projections of the lines of intersection
of the auxiliary planes with Q being thus determined, the
points on the curve of intersection are noted as in the preced-
iag problem.
C. A Line Tangent to the Curve of Inteesection.
Analysis. See § 178.
Construction. The point chosen is 27, lying on the element

7-17. The plane 8 ispassed tangent to the frustum at this

point (Prob. 31, § 162). The required tangent line, T, is
the line of intersection of S with the given plane Q.
D. Development of the Curved Surface. Analysis. The
portion of the curved surface between any two adjacent ele-

ments is approximately a plane quadrilateral, and is assumed

to be such. Any quadrilateral is divisible by either of its
diagonals into two plane triangles, the true sizes and shapes of
which may be plotted from the true lengths of the sides.
The above method of development is a general one, and is
known as development by triangulation. Eor the most accurate
results, each quadrilateral should be divided into triangles by
using the shorter diagonal.
In any convenient position, lay off I'-ll' equal
Construction.
to the true length of 1-11. Triangulate 12' from 1' and 11',
using the true lengths of 1-12 and 11-12. The true length of '

1-12 may be found with the compasses without actually draw-

ing either projection of the line, while the true length of 11-12
is 11*-12''- Triangulate 2' from 1' and 12', just located, using
the true lengths of 1-2 and 2-12. Similarly, triangulate 3'
from 2' and 12', then locate 13' from 3' and 12', and so on until
XXII, §180] PLANE AND CONICAL FRUSTUM 235

x'y' z- j-K" C

Fig. 306 (repeated).

236 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 180

the development is Draw ,the developed elements

complete.
they are obtained, and note as a
2'-12', 3'-13', etc., as fast as

check whether they appear to converge to a point as the ele-

ments of a correctly developed cone should do.
E. The Development of the Curve of Intekseotion.
The points 21', 22', 23', etc., of the curve of intersection are
here found by making l'-21' equal to the true length of 1-21,
2'-22' equal to the true length of 2-22, and so on. They might
also be found by making ll'-21' the true length of 11-21,
12'-22' that of 12-22, etc., but in this case the former set of
true lengths are the easier to obtain. Why ?
F. The Development of the Tangent Line. Note the
triangle 27-t-17, one of whose sides lies along the tangent line
T, and a second side along the element 7-17 containing the
given point 27.
Triangulate t' from 17' and 27', using the true lengths of Vl-t
and 27-^ Then *'-27' is the required development, T', of the
tangent line T.

Problem 43. To find the intersection of a q/linder and a plane.

Analysis. See §§ 173, 177, 178. The same general principles
apply as in the preceding two problems.
Case I. Tlie base of the cylinder lies in H
or V. Construction
(Fig. 307). The base of the given cylinder lies in H. The
given cutting plane is Q. Eight elements of the cylinder have
been chosen. The points in which these elements intersect the
plane Q are here found by passing through them auxiliary
planes perpendicular to V.
The construction is practically a repetition of that of the
preceding problems. We should note, however, that since the
elements of the surface are parallel, the auxiliary planes
through these elements are parallel. Hence the lines of inter-
section, A'', jB*, etc., are parallel.
This gives a method of drawing some of these lines when
but one point of the line is available. The resulting intersec-
tion is the curve 11-12-13 18-11. . . .

The visibility of the section is obtained as explained in § 177.

XXII, §180] PLANE AND CONICAL FRUSTUM 237

x'y' z" j-k-' C

Fig. 306 (repeated).

238 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY fXXII, § 180

The line T (T*, T") is tangent to the section at the point 16.
This line is the intersection of the plane S, passed tangent to
the cylinder at the point 16 (Prob. 34, § 162) with the given
plane Q (§ 178).
Development of the Curved Surface Between the Base
AND Section. First Analysis. The portion of the curved
surface bounded by two adjacent elements and the included
portions of the base and section approximately a plane is

quadrilateral (a trapezoid). The method

of development by
triangulation used to develop the frustum of the cone, Prob. 42,
may therefore be employed.
Second Analysis. Obtain a right section of the cylinder, that
is, a section made by a plane at right angles to the elements.
Eind the true size of the right section. The development of
the right section is a straight line, whose length equals the cir-

cumference of the right section. The developed elements will

be lines at right angles to the developed right section. Any
desired points on the elements can be located by using the true
distances from the right section.
In practical applications of the development of cylinders, the
right section is usually known, being commonly a circle. Con-
sequently development by means of the right section will
be the method adopted here.
Construction. Any plane at right angles to the elements will
cut a right section, and if no other condition prevails the plane
may be chosen at random. Such a plane is the plane R. How
are HR and VB drawn ? (§ 112.)
The intersection of B, and the cylinder must now be found.
The construction is similar to, and entirely independent of,
that used for finding the intersection of plane Q. The result-
ing section is 21-22-23 . . . 28-21.
a figure lying in plane R, its true size may
Since this is

be found by revolving about either trace of R, say about

HR into H (Prob. 24, Cor. 1, § 142 ; Prob. 21, Working Rule,
§ 138). The resulting true size is shown at 21,-22,- . . .

28,-21,
To begin the development, draw a straight line, 21'-21", in
XXII, §180] PLANE AND CYLINDER 239

11-
 -

240 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY PCXII, § 180

any convenient position. Make 21'-22' equal to 21^-22, 22'- ;

23' equal to 22-23, and so on up to 28'-21" equal to 28

;

21,. This straight line is the developed right section.

Draw perpendiculars, representing elements, at 21', 22', etc.

Make 21 '-1' equal to the true length of 21-1 ;

22'-2' equal to
the true length of 22-2 ; etc. The curve l'-2'-3' . . . 8'-l"
thus obtained is the development of the base 1-2-3 . . . 8-1
of the cylinder.
To obtain the development ll'-12'-13' . . 11" of the sec-
.

tion made by the plane Q, we may make the distance 21'-11'

equal the true length of 21-11, 22'-12' the true length of
22-12, etc.
Otherwise, we may make I'-ll' equal to the true length of
1-11, 2'-12' the true length of 2-12, etc. method The latter
is For example,
preferable, as there is less chance for error.
compare the elements 3'-13' and 4'-14'. If 13' is measured
from 3' and 14' from 4', the direction of measurement is the
same but if 13' is measured from 23' and 14' from 24', the
;

direction must be reversed.

A construction for obtaining rapidly all the true lengths of
the elements required in making the development is shown in
the figure. Let the true length of one element, for example
1-11, be obtained by revolving the line parallel to V, as shown
at l''-lli (Prob. 13, First Method, Then, since all the
§ 78).

elements are parallel, the true length of any element can be

found by projecting to the line I'-lli, produced if necessary.
Thus, the true length of 8-28 equals l''-28i, and the true
length of 28-18 equals 28i-18i.
The developed tangent line, T', is determined from the tri-
angle 6-16-s. The point s' is located by using its true
distances, s'-16' and s'-6',. from 16' and 6' respectively.

Case II. The bafse of the cylinder lies in P.

Construction (Fig. 308). The given cylinder is a cylinder
of revolution lying in the third quadrant. It is intersected by
the plane Q.
Eight elements have been chosen, indicated by the numbers 1
to 8 on the P-projection. Points 12, 13, 14, 15 of the intersec-
XXII, §180] PLANE AND CYLINDER 241

Mi
 242 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII,. §180

tion, which lie within the limits of the cylinder, are found, as
in the preceding examples, by finding where the chosen ele-

ments intersect the plane Q.

The plane Q intersects the left-hand base of the cylinder in
the points 19 and 20. To find these points directly, as in the
corresponding case of the cone, Eig. 304, note first that the pro-
file trace of Q on the plane of this base would be determined
from the points x and y, on HQ and VQ respectively (§ 60).
The base which is already projected in profile is the right-
hand base. Therefore project x and y to Xi and yj, and obtain
the projected trace, PjQ. The points 19^ and 20', in which
PiQ intersects the circle, are the profile projections of the re-
quired points, which must then be projected back to the left-

hand base.
The line T is tangent to the section at the point 14. This
line is the intersection of the given plane Q with the plane S,
which is passed tangent to the cylinder at point 14.
The development of the cylinder is obtained readily, since
each base of the cylinder is a right section. The line l'-2'-
3' 8'-l" is the development of the right-hand base, the
• • •

distances l'-2', 2'-3', etc. being equal to 1''2^, 2''3'', etc. By

placing the development of this base in line with its pro-
jections, as shown, the points 12', 13', 14', 15' may be obtained
by projection. The points 19' and 20' are obtained from the
positions of 19'' and 20^'.

• The development, T', of the tangent line is obtained by

locating in the development the triangle 4-14-<.
Case III. lie in H, V or P.
The base of the cylinder does not
Construction (Fig. 309).The given cylinder lies in the third
quadrant, and is intersected by the plane Q in the curve 11-
12-13 18-11. The construction involves nothing that has
• •

not been already explained.

The line T, tangent at the point 12 of the curve of intersec-
tion, is the line of intersection of the given plane Q with the
plane S, passed tangent to the cylinder at point 12.
The development is obtained by the use of a right section.
This is the section 21-22-23 • 28-21, cut by the plane B, per-
XXII, § 180] PLANE AND CYLINDER 243

Fig. 308.
244 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY PCXII, § 180

pendicular to the elements, but otherwise arbitrarily chosen.

The true size of the right section, obtained by revolving about
VR into F, appears at 21,-22, 28,-21,, and its rectification or
• • •

development at 21'-22' 28'-21".

• • •The true lengths of the
elements are obtained by projecting them all on to the true
length of 5-15, obtained at 5''-15i by using the method of
Prob. 3, § 80.
The development of the tangent line is obtained by plotting
the triangle 2-12-c, the point c being any arbitrary point on
the line T. In determining the triangle which shall be used
to develop the tangent line, one side must necessarily be a
portion of the tangent line itself, and a second side must be a
portion of the element. The third side of the triangle may be
a line connecting any convenient points on each of the other
two lines. Heretofore, the point chosen on the tangent line
has always been one of its traces. This is not necessary,
however, and in this case a better shaped triangle and con-
sequently more accurate result is obtained by taking a dif-
ferent point.

181. The Intersection of a Pyramid or Prism with a Plane.

Although the pyramid and prism are bounded by plane in-
stead of curved surfaces, the intersection of either of these
solids with a general oblique plane can often be found most
advantageously by the method of the preceding Article. Con-
sequently the following problem may logically be introduced
at this time.

Problem 44. To find the intersection of a pyramid or prism and a

plane.

Analysis. Let a pyramid be given. Consider the lateral

edges as the elements of a cone. Find the points in which
these elements intersect the given plane, using the method of
Prob. 41 or 42, § 180. Connect the points thus found by
straight lines.
Let a prism be given. Consider the parallel lateral edges as
the" elements of a cylinder, and use the method of Prob. 43,
§ 180. Connect the points found by straight lines.
XXII, §181] PLAN^ AND CYLINDER 245

Fig. 309.
246 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXII, § 181

Construction (Fig. 310). The given solid is a pyramid.

The points in which the lateral edges 0-1, 0-2, 0-3, 0-4 inter-
sect the given plane Q are found by auxiliary planes X, T, Z,

Fig. 310.

W perpendicular to H. The plane X {HX, VX) locates the

common point m", after which the Fitraces of the remaining
planes are not needed. The required intersection is the
quadrilateral 11-12-13-14.
 CHAPTER XXIII
INTERSECTION OF PLANES WITH SURFACES OF
REVOLUTION
182. The Intersection of a Surface of Revolution and a Plane.
The general method of obtaining points in the intersection is
by means of auxiliary planes perpendicular to the axis of the
surface, as has already been explained in § 174. Besides
the points thus found, other points, lying on particular planes
that contain the axis of the surface, are usually essential.
The method outlined above applies to any surface of revolu-
tion,not exclusively to double curved surfaces. We shall,
however, apply it in the present chapter only to such surfaces.
With certain double curved surfaces of revolution, noticeably
the torus, the use of a secondary projection (§ 176) is often
advantageous. This method does not affect the general prin-
ciples, but makes these principles easier to apply.

Problem 45. To find the intersection of a double curved surface

of revolution and a plane.
Analysis. See §§ 174, 176, and above.
First Construction (without the use of a secondary projec-
tion) (Fig. 311). The given surface is that of a circular
spindle, formed by the revolution of the arc of a circle about
its chord. The axis of the surface is placed perpendicular to
H. An auxiliary plane perpendicular to the axis A, such as
X{VX; there is no HX) intersects the given surface in the
circle C, a parallel of the surface (§ 166), and the given plane
Q in the line B (Prob. 12, Special Case III, § 118). The in-

tersection of Bf' and C* determines the H-projections of two

points in the required intersection. Other points are similarly
obtained by other auxiliary planes perpendicular to the axis
A. In the figure are shown the planes Xi, symmetrical with
X, which gives the points 3 and 4, and the plane Z of the
greatest parallel E, which locates the points 5 and 6.

247
248 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXIII, § 182

A. Visibility of the Cueve of Inteesection. In tte

IT-projection is seen all that part of the surface which lies
above the plane Z of the greatest parallel. The points which
divide the visible from the invisible portion of the curve
are 5* and 6*, already determined as in this plane. In the
F-projection appears the half of the surface in front of the
principal meridian plane Y {H.Y, there is no VY\ § 166).
The points of division between the visible and invisible
parts of the F-projection of the intersection lie in the plane
Y, and should be obtained by the direct use of this plane as an
auxiliary.
B. Points Deteemined by Meeidian Planes. The plane
Y intersectsthe given surface in the meridian section which
forms the outline of the F-projection. The plane IF" intersects
the given plane Q in the line J, whose Fprojection, J"", inter-
sects the meridian in the points 7" and 8°. These are points
in the curve of intersection, and, as previously noted, are the
points of division between the visible and invisible portion of
the curve in this projection.
An inspection of the Zf-projection shows that the intersec-
tion symmetric with respect to the meridian plane
is {HM, M
VM), which is perpendicular to Q. For this reason, the plane
M is called the meridian plane of symmetry. The points of the
curve which lie in M
are important, and should be found by
using Mas an auxiliary. In this case they are the highest and
lowest points of the curve. In any case they are points of
maxima or minima, at which the tangent to the curve lies in
a plane perpendicular to the axis of the surface.
The plane M
intersects the given surface in a meridian
(§ 165), the counterpart of that appearing as the Fprojection
of the surface.,This meridian projects on fi' as a portion of
HM; not projected on F, as the need of this projection
it is

can be avoided. The plane M

intersects the given plane Q in
the line K K") (Prob. 12, § 118). Since the plane
(£"*, M
contains the axis, A, of the surface, the lines A and Winter-
sect in a point, o, whose F-projection is at o". Note that J°,
previously determined as lying in the principal meridian plane
XXIII, § 182] PLANE AND CIRCULAR SPINDLE 249

T, must also pass through o", the point o being in fact the
A with the given plane Q.
intersection of the axis
Revolve the plane M about the axis A until M coincides
with the principal meridian plane Y. The line K, lying in M,
will take the position K^ (if/, K;-). The revolution is here
250 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXIII, § 182

Second Construction (using a secondary projection) (Pig.

312). The given torus is to be intersected by the plane Q.
To obtain an edge view of Q, assume a secondary ground line,

Fia. 312.

GiLi, perpendicular to HQ in any convenient location; then

proceed as in § 70. The secondary projection of the given
torus is identical in form with the original F^projection.
Considering now
the B'-projection and the secondary V-
projection as the given projections of the torus, and ViQ as
XXIII, § 182] PLANE AND TORUS 251

the edge view of the secant plane, we have the same con-
ditions as in § § 84, 85, and 86 in particular, a case similar to
;

that shown in Fig. 109. Having obtained the points 1 to 10

in the If-projectionby the construction there given, the same
points are projected to the original F-projection (§§ 68, 72).
A. Points Determined by Meridian Planes. Points on
the meridian plane of symmetry M
are needed to complete
the ^-projection. These and the points on the principal
meridian plane Fare needed to complete the F-projection.
The meridian of the torus which lies in the plane of sym-
metry Mappears in true size in the secondary F-projection,
it being the two circles which form a part of this projection.

Since ViQ is an edge view, the points required appear directly

at 111' and 121", where FiQ intersects one of these circles.
The F-projections, 11" and 12", are found by transferring
heights from the secondary projection.
The points in the principal meridian plane Y are found as
explained in the preceding case. The plane T intersects Q in
the line J, the F-projection J' being parallel to VQ. The
meridian projects as the two which are a part of the
circles
F-projection. The possible intersections, 13" and 14", of J"
with these circles determine the required points. At 13" and
14" the projection of the curve of intersection is tangent to
the meridian circle.

B. Visibility of the Curve oe Intersection. In the

jEf-projection can be seen the upper half of the surface, lying
above the plane of the greatest and least parallels. The points
visible are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 12. In the F-projection, only
the front half of the outer portion of the surface can be seen.
This visible portion is projected in the plan as the part in
front of HY
and outside of circle D. A point like 6, for ex-
ample, although in front of the principal meridian plane Y,
is nevertheless invisible in F-projection, being hidden by a

portion of the surface still further in front. Beginning at

the left, the visible portion of the F-projection begins at point
13, lying in the principal meridian plane F, extends through
9, 11, 10, 8, 4, and ends at point 2 in the highest parallel, D.
252 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXIII, § 182

C. A Line Tangent to the Intersection. A tangent

line is drawn at the point 10. This line is the intersection of
the given plane Q with the plane S, tangent to the surface at
point 10 (§ 178). Find the tangent plane S by any conven-
ient method (Prob. 38, § 170). Here only the S'-trace, H8, is
found. The intersection of HS and HQ locates one point, s,

of the tangent line T. A second point is the given point 10

of the intersection, which is here used instead of finding the
F-trace, VS, of the tangent plane.

Fig. 313.

183. Points in Meridian Planes. Attention has already been

called, in the preceding constructions, to certain properties of
XXIII, § 184] PLANE AND TORUS 253

the points which lie in the principal meridian plane and the
meridian plane of symmetry. These points are of sufficient
importance to warrant a further discussion. In an actual con-
struction, instead of finding these points last, as was done in
explaining the preceding problem, it is better to find them at
the outset. This is shown in Fig. 313, in which are found

Fig. 314.

only the points lying in the meridian plane of symmetry M,

and the principal meridian plane Y, the construction being the
same as that used in Fig. 312. The construction is repeated
in Fig. 314 for the same planes M and Y. In this case we find
that there are no points in the meridian plane of symmetry M.
184. The Number of Curves. The intersection of a plane and
a torus always consists of either one or two closed curves.
The number can be foretold as soon as the edge view of the
secant plane is obtained. Thus, in Fig. 312, the edge view
254 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXIII, § 184

F]Q of the secant plane intersects but one of the circles lying
in the meridian plane of symmetry M. By visualizing the
position of the cutting plane with respect to the torus, it can
be seen that the intersection will consist of but one curve,
with the point 11 as its lowest point.
Tn Eig. 313, the edge view FiQ intersects both circles lying
in the meridian plane of symmetry M, giving four points, 1,

Fig. 314 (repeated).

2, 3, and 4. Here, again by visualization, the intersection is

seen to consist of two distinct curves, one wholly inside the

other. The point 1 is the highest, and the point 4 the lowest
point of the intersection; no auxiliary planes need be taken
beyond these limits. It may be noted in passing that these
four points on the line of intersection, K, of the planes
lie M
and Q, and that their F"-projections are here determined as
lying on K"- (Compare Fig. 311.)
XXIII, § 184] PLANE AND TORUS 255

In Fig. 314, the edge view ViQ does not intersect either circle
lying in the meridian plane of symmetry M, and, as previously
noted, there are no points in this plane. Yet the plane
Q
obviously intersects the torus. Visualization here reveals the
fact that the intersection in this case consists of two separate
curves, symmetrically placed with respect to the plane M.
happens that the edge view of the given
It occasionally
secant plane is found to be tangent to one or both of the
circles lying in the meridian plane of symmetry. In this
event, the plane is actually tangent to the torus, yet at the
same time intersects the surface in a curve.
A point of tangency of the secant plane gives a double
point in the curve of intersection ; that is, a point in which

Fig. 315. Fig. 316. Fig. 317.

the curve crosses itself at an angle. According to whether

the plane does or does not intersect the second circle lying
in the meridian plane of symmetry, the resulting projection
resembles Fig. 315 or 316, respectively. Each of these forms
is considered a single curve. •

If the given secant plane is tangent to the torus at two

points, there are two double points in the intersection (Fig.
317). In this case can be proved analytically that the
it

actual intersection consists of two equal circles.

Summarizing, it may be stated that if the edge view of the
secant plane is found in the same relation to both meridian
circles of the torus, that is, secant to both, or tangent to both,
or passing between the two without touching either, there will
always be two curves. Any other position of the secant plane
means one curve.
 CHAPTER XXIV
THE INTERSECTION OF CURVED SURFACES BY CURVED
SURFACES
185.The Intersection of Two Curved Surfaces. The inter-
section of two curved surfaces is, in general, a space curve,
or curve of three dimensions (§ 150). Points in this curve
may be found as follows. Let 8i and ;S'2 be the intersecting
surfaces. Let X
be any auxiliary surface, intersecting Si in a
line Ci, and S2 in a line C^- Then the point or points of inter-
section of Cj and Cj lie in the line of intersection of Si and S^-
In order that the application of this method shall be a success,
it is evident that the intersections of X
with Si and S2 must
be simpler or more easily found than the intersection of the
given surfaces Si and ;S'2.

186. The Auxiliary Surfaces. Whenever possible, the auxil-

iary surfaces employed are planes, so chosen as to intersect
both the given surfaces in either straight lines or circles.
This cannot always be accomplished, even when straight lines
or circles can be drawn on each of the given surfaces.
Spheres are employed occasionally as auxiliary surfaces.
Their use is generally limited to cases in which they can be so
placed as to intersect each of the given surfaces in circles.
When no auxiliary surfaces can be found which will cut
both given surfaces simultaneously in simple intersections, it
is usual to employ planes. These are placed as advantageously
as possible with respect to one of the given surfaces, but their
intersections with the other given surface must needs be found
by means of secondary auxiliary surfaces.

187. Visibility of the Curve of Intersection. When two sur-

faces or solids intersect, both will be considered opaque, and
no portion of either removed unless so stated. (Compare
256
 :

XXIV, § 188] INTERSECTION OF CURVED SURFACES 257

§§ 85, 125 et seq.) In any projection, then, a point in the

curve of intersection can be visible only when it lies on a
visible portion of each of the given surfaces. Or, to put it
another way, a point is invisible if it is on an invisible portion
of either of the given surfaces.
In any projection, let the visible portion of the curve of
intersection be considered as traced by a moving point. Un-
less the entire intersection is visible, which is possible but
rarely happens, the moving point will soon reach a place
where can go no further on the curve, an invisible portion
it

of the curve having been reached. This change must evi-

dently take place on the contour or outline of the surface.
Hence from this point on, the contour of the surface must be
visible,and may be considered as the continuation of the path
of the moving point. This is a matter often overlooked by
students in determining the combined visibility of a pair of
intersecting solids.

188. A Line Tangent to the Curve of Intersection. In general,

a line tangent at any point in the intersection of two curved
surfaces may be determined by finding the line of intersection
of two planes. For the chosen point lies at the same time in
each of the given surfaces, to each of which the line tangent
to the curve is tangent. Then a plane passed tangent to either
surface at the given point must contain the line in question,
since a tangent plane contains all the lines tangent to the sur-
face at that point (§ 154). Hence we may state the following
rule
1. Pass a plane tangent to each of the given surfaces at the
given point.
2. Find the line of intersection of these two planes. This line
is the required tangent line.
It will be observed that this rule is perfectly general,
and applies to the intersection of any two curved surfaces
whatever. The rule fails when the two tangent planes coin-
cide, which occurs at a point where there is a multiple or
isolated point in the intersection.
 CHAPTER XXV
THE INTERSECTION OF CONES AND CYLINDERS WITH
EACH OTHER
189. The Intersection of Cones and Cylinders. The intersec-
tion of two surfaces, each of which may be either a cone or a
cylinder, gives rise to three problems yiz. the intersection of
;

(a) Two cylinders.

(6) Two cones.
(c) A cylinder and a cone.

These are essentially three cases of a single problem namely, ;

the intersection of two single curved surfaces, and the same

general principles can be applied throughout. In considering
the details of construction, however, it is more cbnvenient to
treat the cases as separate problems.

190. The Auxiliary Planes. In finding the intersections of

cyliaders and cones, we shall employ planes as the auxiliary

Fig. 318. Fig. 319.

surfaces (§ 185). It is always possible to place planes so that

they will cut elements, that is, straight lines, from each of the
given surfaces. To verify this statement, let us study the
conditions which are thus, imposed upon the planes.
To cut elements from a cylinder, the secant plane must be
parallel to the axis of the cylinder (Fig. 318). This is a
258
XXV, § 192] CONES AND CYLINDERS 259

necessary, but not a sufficient condition, since a plane may

evidently be parallel to the axis of a cylinder, and yet so far re-
moved as not to intersect at
all. But if the plane does con-
tain one ortwo elements, it is parallel to the axis. This is the
condition imposed by the cylinder.
A plane which contains elements of a cone must contain the
vertex of the cone (Eig. 319). Hence the cone imposes the
condition that all auxiliary planes must contaiQ its vertex.
Considering now the three cases, the auxiliary planes must
f uliill simultaneously the following conditions.
(a) Two cylinders. The planes must be parallel to the axis
of each cylinder.
(6) Two cones. The planes must contain the vertex of each
cone.
(c) A cylinder and a cone. The planes must contain the
vertex of the cone, and be parallel to the axis of the cylinder.

191. The Number of Curves. We confine ourselves to cones

and cylinders of the ordinary closed forms, with circles or
ellipses for bases (§ 158). In the general case of intersection
of two such surfaces, where no element of either surface is
parallel to any element of the other surface, the intersection
will consist either of one or of two closed curves (curves of
three dimensions, § 185). When each solid cuts into, but not
wholly through, the other solid, there will be a single curve of
intersection. But if every element of either solid actually
intersects the other solid, there will be two separate curves.
In either case, the projections of these curves on the coordi-
nate planes may, and generally do, contain cusps and loops,
although there are none in the curves themselves.
Special cases, resulting from parallel elements, or particular
positions of the solids, will be better understood after some
actual intersections have been found. The discussion of these
cases is therefore deferred. (See § 193 et seq.)

192. General Cases. We shall now take up the general

cases, in which the intersection coilsists of either one or two
closed curves.
260 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXV, § 192

Problem 46. To find the intersection of two q/linders.

Analysis. Assume any point in space. Through this point

pass the plane which is parallel to the axis of each cylinder
(Prob. 8, § 107). An auxiliary plane parallel to this plane
will intersect each cylinder in elements of the surface (§ 190).
The points in which these elements intersect will lie in the
curve or curves of intersection of the cylinders (§ 185). Evi-
dently the auxiliary planes must be so chosen that they will
contain at least one element of each surface.
Example 1. Construction (Eig. 320). The given cylinders
lie in the first quadrant, with their bases on H. They are
distinguished by the A
and B. Let o (o*, o") be any
letters
assumed point in space. Through o draw the line K, parallel
to the axis of the cylinder A, and the line L, parallel to the
axis of the cylinder B. Eind the plane which containsX
these two lines. Only the JT-trace, HX, is here found, as it
will soon be seen that in this case it is suf&cient. Planes
parallel to X
will cut elements from each cylinder. Let HM
be the If-trace of a parallel plane. By noting where HM
intersects the base of each cylinder, we see that M cuts the
elements C and D from cylinder A, and the elements E and F
from cylinder B. The intersections of these elements deter-
mine four points, 3, 7, 11, and 15, on the required curve.
A. Choosing the Auxiliary Planes. The Limiting
Planes. Planes parallel to M
and behind it will intersect
each cylinder in two elements until we reach the plane T,
which is tangent to the cylinder B. This plane contains two
elements of A, but only one of B, which intersect in but two
points, 1 and 9, of the curve. Beyond T a parallel plane
would cease to intersect B, hence we have reached the limit of
useful auxiliary planes in this direction. (See the Analysis.)
Coming forward from the plane M, we reach the limit of
useful planes with the plane Z, tangent to the cylinder A. A
plane in front of Z will contain no elements of the cylinder A.
The planes Fand Z are called the limiting planes. They are
the first auxiliary planes which should be drawn. As soon as
they are located, the number of intersections one or two —
XXV, § 192] TWO CYLINDERS 261

Fig. 320.
262 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXV, § 192

(§ 191) — can
be foretold. In the present case, one limiting
plane tangent to one of the solids, the other plane tangent
is

to the other solid. This means that each solid cuts part way,
but not completely through the other, and the intersection con-
sists ofone continuous curve.
After the limiting planes are drawn, a suffteient number of
intermediate auxiliary planes are chosen. In choosing these
planes, they should be passed, as far as possible, so as to con-
taia the contour (outside) elements of the various projections.
Thus the plane U is passed through the point 2-16 in the base
of the cylinder A, and contains the upper contour element of
the l^^projection of this cylinder. The plane W
passes through
4-14 on the base of A, and contains the front contour element
of the ^'-projection. Incidentally, these same planes also
contain contour elements of the cylinder B, which, however,
cannot always be expected to happen.
B. NUMBBEING THE PoiNTS OF THE InTEKSECTION. To
locate the projections of the points, and to connect these
projections in the proper sequence after they are obtained,
a system for numbering the points as fast as found is desirable.
Take some point of the curve of intersection as the initial
point, number 1. This point is preferably one of the points
m. one of the limiting planes. Here the point taken lies in the
plane Y. Observe the if-projection of this point. Follow the
two elements, one of each cylinder, passing through this point,
to the respective bases, and place duplicate numbers 1 on HT
as shown.
Point 2 must lie in the plane adjacent to Y, that is, in plane
U, and also on the element in each cylinder adjacent to that
numbered 1. On the base of A there is no choice, and point
2 is placed on HU as shown. On the cylinder B either element
lying in the plane U is adjacent to element 1. Choice is here
made as shown by the number 2 on the base of B. That is,

having chosen our starting point on the curve, we may also

choose the direction in which we shall go around.
For point 3 and subsequent points there is no choice. Point
3 must lie in the plane M, and on the bases of both A and B
XXV, § 192] TWO CYLINDERS 263

Fig. 320 (repeated).

264 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY PCKV, § 192

the number 3 must be placed on the nearer element to 2. Con-

tinuing, the two put on HW, and the two 5's on HZ.
4's are
We have now followed the curve across all the planes the ;

curve, in contiuuiag, crosses the planes in reverse order, so

that point 6 is W, point 7 in plane M, and so
in the plane
on. To place the two 6's on HW, note that on the base of
B the 6 must be placed on the same element as 4, siuoe this is
the nearer element in cylinder B to the element 5. Conse-
quently on the base of cylinder A
number 6 must not be
the
placed on the same element as 4, as that would make point 6
on the curve identical with 4. Hence point 6 on the base of
A can be placed only as shown. The two 7's on HM, the two
8's on HU and the two 9's on HY
follow naturally. Having
again followed the curve across the planes, and not yet
reached the starting point, we must agaia turn back. To
place the two lO's on HU, the argument is similar to that
for placing the two 6's on HW.
The remainder of the
numbers follow in order, no new difB.culties.
presenting
Pinally, reaching the two 16's on HU, we see that the next
point on each base is the initial point 1, and we have com-
pleted the circuit.
In an actual construction, the duplicate numbers on the
bases should be placed before any elements are drawn. There
is a noticeable symmetry in their placing, provided we start

with a point in a limiting plane, which enables this to be done.

The elements are then drawn, and the points in the intersec-
tion are marked with the same numbers. The points may
then be readily connected in order.
C. Visibility of the Curve or Intersection. A point
in the intersection is visible only when each of the elements,
one of each surface, in which it lies, is visible (§ 187). The
visibility in any projection is most readily determined by con-
structing a table of the visible points,' as shown below. The
points on contour elements are to be included as visible.
D. Visibility in the ZT-Peojection.
Cylinder A, if alone — Points 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 14, 16, 16.
Cylinder B, if alone— Points 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 16.
XXV, § 192] TWO CYLINDERS 265

Fig. 320 (repeated).

266 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY PCXV, § 192

The Intersection, being the points common to the two preceding

lists — Points 1," 2, 9, 14, 15, 16.
Line in the portions 1-2 and 14-15-16 of the jET-pr ejection
of the curve. Since the numbers on the curve form an endless
circuit, point 1 follows 16, and the portion 16-1 is visible.
The isolated point 9 being found visible, it means that the
entire contour element passing through 9 is visible. The other
visible contour elements, tangent from 2 and 14, are now put
in by the rule given in § 187.
E. Visibility in the F-peojection.
Cylinder A. Points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16.
Cylinder B. Points 3, 4, 6, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14.
The Intersection. Points 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14.
In the F-projection, then, there are two visible portions of
the curve, 3-4-5-6-7 and 12-13-14. At point 7 the projection
forms a cusp, and is not tangent to either contour element.
The point 7 in fact lies on each of these contour elements, and
the tangent at this point to the curve in space is perpendicular
to V. The visible contour elements are those tangent from
points 3, 12, and 14.
F. A Line Tangent to the Cukve of Intersection.
Analysis. See § 188.
Construction. In order that the general construction may be
shown, it is necessary to select a point which does not lie in a
limiting plane, nor on a contour element. At point 1, for
example, the curve is tangent to the element 1 of cylinder A,
while at a point 2 the projection of the tangent in each view
coincides with a contour element of one of the cylinders.
Let point 10 be chosen. Pass the plane B, tangent to the
cylinder A
at point 10 (Prob. 34, § 162) also the plane 8, ;

tangent to the cylinder B at point 10. The line of intersection,

(r*, T"), of these two planes is the required tangent line.
In this case, the intersection of HR
and HS is inaccessible.
However, no auxiliary construction is necessary, since the
projections of T can be readily determined by the intersection
of VR and VS, and the fact that T must pass through point
10 of the curve.
XXV, § 192] TWO CYLINDERS 267

Fig. 320 (repeated).

268 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXV, § 192

Example 2. Construction (Fig. 321). The base of the given

cylinder A lies in H, while the base of B lies in V. This will
necessitate the use of both traces of the auxiliary planes.
Let (o*, o") be any assumed point in space. Through o
draw line K, parallel to the elements of cylinder A, and line

Fig. 321.

L, parallel to the elements of cylinder B. Find the plane

X {HX, VX) passing through these lines. All the auxiliary
planes must be parallel to X.
The limiting planes Y and Z are drawn first. The fact that
both these planes are tangent to the base of A can only be
found by trial. Planes whose F-traces are tangent to the base
of B can be drawn parallel to the plane X
but if drawn, it
;

will be found that the Zf-traces of these planes do not intersect

XXV, § 192) TWO CYLINDERS 269

the base of A. These planes must therefore be rejected, since

they contain no element of the cylinder A (§ 190).
Both limiting planes being found tangent to the same solid,
that is, in this case cylinder A, it means that A completely
penetrates the other cylinder, every element of A intersecting
cylinder B. Hence there are two separate curves of inter-
section.
The auxiliary planes between the limits T and Z are chosen
so as to contain the various contour elements of the surfaces,
as in the previous example.
A. Numbering the Points. The method of numbering the
points for a two-curve intersection differs in detail, but not in
principle, from the method of the one-curve intersection of
Example 1.
As every element of A intersects B, it follows that each
curve passes completely around cylinder A, but only part way
around cylinder B. Consider each curve separately. Then,
placing the duplicate numbers ,1 on one of the limiting planes,
as Y, the numbers on the base of A will follow consecutively
in the same direction entirely around the base, while for the
base of cylinder B, the numbers will proceed as far as 5, then
reverse direction as shown. Commencing with 9 for the
second curve, the base of A is numbered completely around in
one continuous direction (either the same direction as before,
or the opposite), while on the base of B the numbers run from
9 to 13, and then reverse.
The projections of the points in the intersection are now
obtained readily, and connected in the order of the numbers.
B. Visibility of the Curves of Inteesection. The
visibility is determined, as in Example 1, by constructing
tables of the visible points.
C. Visibility in the ZT-projection.
Cylinder A. Points 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 15, 16.
Cylinder B. Points 1, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16.

Intersection. Points 1, 9, 10, 11, 15, 16.

The result is the isolated point 1 on one curve, and the con-
tinuous line 15-16-9-10-11 on the other.
270 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [JCXV, § 192

D. Visibility in the F-projection.

Cylinder A. Points 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 15, 16.
Cylinder B. Points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8.
Intersection. Points 1, 2, 6, 7, 8.

The result is the continuous portion 6-7-8-1-2 of one curve.

The other curve is entirely invisible.
After the visible portions of the curves of intersection have
been lined in, the visible contour elements are determined as
explained in Example 1.

Problem 47. To find the intersection of a cylinder and a cone.

Analysis. Through the vertex of the

. cone draw a line
parallel to the elements of the cylinder. Auxiliary planes
passed through this line will intersect each of the given
surfaces in elements (§ 190). The intersection is then deter-
mined as in the case of the two cylinders (Prob. 46).
Construction (Fig. 322). The cone A is to be intersected by
the cylinder B. Through the vertex a (a*, a") of the cone,
draw the line L (Z/*, L") parallel to the elements of the cylinder.
Since the base of one solid lies in H, while the base of the
other is in V, both traces of the auxiliary planes will be
needed (Prob. 46, Ex. 2). Hence find both the H-tia,ce, s, and
the F-trace, t, of the line L. Then all the JJ-traces of the
planes will pass through s, and all the F-traces through t

(§ 98). The limiting plane T is found to be tangent to the

cone, while the limiting plane Z is tangent to the cylinder.
This means that the intersection will consist of one continuous
curve (Prob. 46, Ex. 1). The remainder of the construction
involves nothing that has not been explained in the preceding
problem.
A Line Tangent to the Cukve of Intersection. The
line T (T*, T") is tangent to the intersection at point 12. To
find this line, pass the plane B, tangent to the cone, along
element 12 (Prob. 31, § 162), and the plane S, tangent to. the
cylinder, along element 12 (Prob. 34, § 162). Then find the
line of intersection of these two tangent planes (§ 188 Prob. ;

46, Ex. 1).

XXV, § 192] CYLINDER AND CONE 271

Fig. 322.
272 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXV, § 192

Problem 48. To find the intersection of two cones.

Analysis. Draw the line whicli passes through the two ver-
tices of the cones. Auxiliary planes passed through this line
will intersect each of the given surfaces in elements (§ 190).
The intersection is then determined as in the case of two inter-
secting cylinders (Prob. 46).

Construction (Eig. 323). The given cones are A and B.

Draw the line L {U-, L") which connects the vertices, a and b, of
the two cones. Eind the fl"-traee, s, of this line : then all the
^'-traces of the auxiliary planes pass through s (§ 98). Since
the bases of both cones lie in H, only the 2f-traces of the
auxiliary planes are needed (Prob. 46, Ex. 1). The limiting
planes Y and Z are both tangent to the base of A, showing
that the intersection consists of two separate curves (Prob. 46,
Ex. 2). The remainder of the construction involves nothing
that has not been already explained.
The line T is tangent to the intersection at point 10. It
is the line of intersection of the plane R, tangent to the cone
A along the element a-10, and plane S, tangent to cone B
along the element &-10 (§ 188).

193. Special Cases. There are two general reasons for special
cases of the preceding three problems : (a) limiting planes tan-
gent to both surfaces simultaneously ; (6) parallel elements.

194. Limiting Planes Doubly Tangent. If a limiting plane

is tangent to both surfaces, it contains but a single element of
each surface. These elements intersect in a point through
which both branches of the curve of intersection must pass.
The intersection is a continuous curve, containing one double
point.
If both limiting planes are tangent to each surface, the in-
tersection breaksup into two plane curves. Since the only
plane curves which can be drawn on a cylinder are circles and
ellipses, the intersection will take these forms when one or
both of the given surfaces is a cylinder. If both surfaces are
cones, the intersection may consist of any of the conic sections.
XXV, § 194] TWO CONES 273

Fig. 323.
274 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXV, § 194

Thus, in Eig. 324, which shows the F-projection only, the

plane X, parallel to the left-hand contour element of the cone
whose vertex is a, cuts a parabola from this cone. A cone

Fig. 324.

whose vertex is 6 can evidently be placed so as to contain the

same parabola, which thus becomes the line of intersection of
the two cones. In this case the cones intersect agaia ia a
closed curve, an ellipse or circle E.
If two cones are identical in form, and placed so that their
corresponding elements are parallel (Fig. 326), the intersec-

FiG. 325.

tion is one branch of a hyperbola. In this case there is no

other intersection on the two nappes of the cone which are
here shown ; but the upper nappes of the cones will intersect
in the second branch of the same hyperbola.

195. Parallel Elements. If two elements, one in each sur-

face, are parallel, the intersection of the surfaces may, though
not necessarily, have one or more infinite branches.
XXV, § 195] CYLINDERS AND CONES 275

A. Two Cylinders. In the case of two cylinders, if there

is one pair of parallel elements, all the elements of both sur-
faces are parallel, and the intersection can consist only of
straight lines.
B. A CxLiNDEE AND A CoNE. In the case of a cylinder
and a cone, since no two elements of the cone are parallel,
there can be but one element of the cone parallel to the ele-
ments of the cylinder ; but this element of the cone will then
be parallel to all the elements of the cylinder. Hence, when
we start to find the intersection by drawing a linethrough the
vertex of the cone parallel to the elements of the cylinder,
this line coincides with an element of the cone.

In Eig. 326, which shows an fi'-projection only, letA be the

base of the cone, and B the base of the cylinder, both bases in
jff. Let the jEf-trace of the line through the vertex of the cone
parallel to the elements of the cylinder be ats, which is neces-

sarily on the base of A, for reasons which have been given.

In the situation shown, since both limiting planes Y and Z
are tangent to the same base B, we might expect a two-curve
intersection. One intersection is not affected by the parallel
elements, and is a closed curve, found by the elements 1 to 6.
The second intersection does not exist, since the single element
through point s does not intersect the cylinder. Hence the
intersection consists of a single closed curve.
Now let the cone and cylinder be placed as in Fig. 327,
which differs from Eig. 326 in that the plane M, tangent to
the cone along the parallel element, has now become one of
the auxiliary planes. The single intersection of the preceding
276 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXV, § 195

case now contains two infinite points, numbers 3 and 7. The

result is that the curve of intersection, as traced on the sur-
face of the cylinder, consists of two infinite branches, to which
the elements 3 and 7 are asymptotic. These two branches of
the intersection lie on opposite nappes of the cone.
The preceding two examples do not exhaust all the possi-
bilities of this case. They are, however, the most general
ones, and, taken together, give a typical illustration of the
formation of infinite branches.

C. Two In the case of two cones, to discover the

Cones.
number of parallel elements,draw a third cone, whose vertex
coincides with the vertex of one of the given cones, and whose
elements are parallel respectively to the elements of the other.
Then, corresponding to the number of possible points which
two ellipses may have iu common, we may find one, two,
three, or four pairs of parallel elements, or every element of
one cone may be parallel to an element of the other cone.
The latter case is that already illustrated in Fig. 325, the
intersection being a hyperbola. The possibilities of the other
cases are quite numerous. As an extreme result, each curve
of a normal two-curve intersection may be broken into two
infinite parts, so that the complete intersection consists of four
infinite branches, two branches on each nappe of each cone.
Since the method of dealing with infinite points has already
been shown for the case of the cylinder and cone, a further
discussion will not be made.
XXV, § 196] ' CYLINDERS AND CONES 277

196. The Intersection of Cylinders and Cones of Revolution. If

we limit ourselves to cylinders and cones of revolution, usu-
ally the case ia practice, simpler solutions than those given in
§ 192 can often be found. It may be of advantage to take
auxiliary planes so as to intersect one or both of the given
surfaces in circles. For example, consider the intersection of
a cylinder and cone, the axes of which are at right angles (not
necessarily intersecting). Auxiliary planes can be passed per-
pendicular to the axis of the cone, cutting the cone in circles,

and the cylinder in straight lines (elements).

If the axes of the surfaces intersect at some oblique angle,
auxiliary spheres may be used. (See Prob. 49, Ex. 2, § 197.)

A method available when one, at least, of the given surfaces

is a cylinder, is to make a projection on a plane at right angles
to the axis of the cylinder. The entire curved surface of the
cylinder will then project as a circle, a part or all of which
necessarily becomes one projection of the required intersec-
tion of the given surfaces.
 CHAPTER XXVI
THE INTERSECTION OF VARIOUS CURVED SURFACES
197. The Intersection of Two Curved Surfaces of Revolution.

The two surfaces of revolution can be readily

intersection of
found when the axes of the surfaces are in the same plane,
that is, either intersect or are parallel.

Problem 49. To find the intersection of two surfaces of revolu-

tion whose axes intersect.

Analysis. With the point in which the axes of the surfaces

intersect as a series of auxiliary spheres
center, describe
(§ 186). These spheres will intersect both given surfaces
in circles. The intersections of the corresponding circles
locate points in the required intersection.
In order to get simple working projections of the auxiliary
circles, one coordinate plane should be parallel to the two axes
of the surfaces, the other coordinate plane perpendicular to
one of the axes. (See the Construction.)
Example 1. Construction (Fig. 328). The given surfaces
are those of a cone and an ellipsoid of revolution, placed in
the third quadrant. The plane Y {HY) which contains the
axes of both surfaces is parallel to V. This plane is evidently
a plane of symmetry of the required intersection, and contains
two points, noted directly in the F-projeetion at 1" and 2".
The axes of the given surfaces intersect in the point o (o*, o").

With 0" as center, and any assumed radius, draw the outline,
S", of an auxiliary sphere. This sphere intersects the cone
in twocircles, A and B, and the ellipsoid in the circle C, all
projected in V as straight lines. The intersections of A' and
B" with O
determine the F-projections of four points, 3, 4, 5,
and 6, of the required intersection. To obtain the ff-projec-
278
XXVI, § 197] CONE AND ELLIPSOID 279

tions of these points, uote that the circle C projects as a circle,

0*, in H. Find by projection 3*, 4*, 5*, and 6* in C7*.

Other points are similarly obtained by the use of other

Fig. 328.

auxiliary spheres. The only other sphere shown in the^figure

is. T.iT% tangent to the cone.. This sphere is tangent to the
cone in the circle D, and intersects the ellipsoid in the circle
E. The intersections: of D
and E
are the points 7 and 8,
the lowest points of the curve of intersection.
280 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXVI, § 197

Example 2. Construction (Fig. 329). The given surfaces

are those of a frustum of a cone and a cylinder of revolution,
placed in the third quadrant with their axes parallel to V.
The common meridian plane T of the two surfaces contains
the two points 1 and 2.
Other points are found by the use of auxiliary spheres
whose centers are at the point of intersection o, of the axes.
One sphere, S {S"), is shown in the figure.
This cuts the circle A from the cylinder, and the circle Cfrom
the cone. The intersections of these circles are points 3 and
4 on the intersection. Other points are similarly obtained.
CoEOLLAEY. To find the intersection of two surfaces of revo-
lution whose axes are parallel.

Analysis. Pass auxiliary planes perpendicular to the axes

'

of the surfaces. These planes will cut circles from each sur-
face. The intersections of these circles determine points in
the required intersection.
In order to get simple working projections of the circles,
the axes of the surface should be perpendicular to one of the
coordinate planes. .

No figure for this case is deemed necessary.

198. The Intersection of a Sphere with Another Surface. When

one of two intersecting surfaces is a sphere, the auxiliary sur-
faces commonly employed are planes, since every plane section
of a sphere a circle. Simple projections of these circles,
is

however, result only when the auxiliary planes are parallel to

Hov V.
Cases of this kind have already been discussed (§§ 129,
131). But planes parallel to If or Fmay not always cut ad-
vantageous sections from the second surface.
In such cases, the planes are chosen with respect to the
second surface, and various devices are adopted to avoid pro-
jecting the sections of the sphere as ellipses. Two general
methods are (a) revolution of the auxiliary- planes ;
(b) the
use of a secondary projection. These methods will be shown
in the following two problems.
XXVI, § 198] CONICAL FRUSTUM AND CYLINDER 281

Fig. 329.
282 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXVI, § 198

Problem 50. To find the intersection of a sphere and a cone.

Analysis. Planes passed through the vertex of the cone will

cut elements from the cone (§ 190), and circles from the sphere.
Let these planes be taken perpendicular to one of the coordinate
planes, say to H. Revolve each plane until parallel to V, carry-
ing with it the elements cut from the cone, and the circle cut from
the sphere. The circle will now appear in true shape and size.
Note the points of intersection of the revolved circle and ele-
ments. Obtain their projections by counter-revolution.
A convenient axis about which to revolve the planes is a line
perpendicular to H through the vertex of the cone, since all
the planes will contain this line.

Construction (Fig.- 330). The given surfaces are those of

a cone whose vertex is o, and a sphere whose center is e.
Let auxiliary planes be passed perpendicular to through the H
vertex of the cone. Of these planes, the plane has been W
selected as typical, and all the others omitted from the figure
for the sake of clearness. The plane W appears in edge view
at HW; the trace VW is not drawn, since it is understood
that the plane is perpendicular to H. The plane intersects
the cone in the elements 0-1 and 0-2. It intersects the sphere
in a circle, of which 3*-4* is a diameter. The center of this
circle projects at 5*, the middle point of 3*-4'. Let the plane
W be revolved about an axis passing through o until it coin-
cides with the plane Y, parallel to V. The elements 0-1 and
0-2 will now appear in F^projection as 0"-!,. and 0''-2,. The
center, 5, of the circle is found at 6,.. Note that, although we
have not the F-projection, 5", of point 5, it is not necessary,
since point 5 and the center, e, of the sphere are at the same
distance above H. With 6, as center, radius equal to 5*-3'' or
6''-4'', draw the circle C„ which represents the circle cut from

the sphere by the plane W. In this case both elements inter-

sect the circle. This gives four intersections, 6,., 7„ 8„ 9„
from which the projections of four points in the required inter-
section are obtained by counter-revolution. Enough other
points to determine the intersection are similarly obtained.
XXVI, § 198] SPHERE AND CONE 283

¥ia. 330.
284 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXVI, § 198

Problem 51. To find the intersection of a sphere and a q/linder.

Analysis. To cut elements from the cylinder, auxiliary

planes must be taken parallel to its axis (§ 190). Let these
planes be taken perpendicular to H. Assume a secondary
plane of projection parallel to the axis of the cylinder. This
plane will be parallel to all the auxiliary planes, so that on it

all the circles cut from the sphere by the auxiliary planes will
appear in true shape and size. Hence project the circle and
elements lying in each auxiliary plane to the secondary plane
of projection. Note the points' of intersection. Project these
points back to H and V.
Construction (Fig. 331). The given surfaces are those of a
sphere whose center is o, and a. cylinder whose axis is A.
Assume a secondary ground line GjLi parallel to the axis of
the cylinder.The center of the sphere projects to Oi'. To
obtain the direction of the elements of the cylinder in the
secondary projectioij, we may project the axis, as shown at
Ai". Pass auxiliary planes perpendicular to parallel to theH
axis A. The ff-trace and edge view of one such plane is shown
a,t HW; all the others are opaitted in the figure for the sake of
clearness. Plane TF intersects the cylinder in two elements, E
and F, and the sphere in a circle C. Find the secondary pro-
jection of the elements and circle. The elements project as
^i" and Fi", parallel to Ai". The circle projects as Ci", the
center coinciding with Oi", while the diameter is obtained from
the if-projection. We thus obtain four intersections, Ij", 21",

Sx", Ai". These are the projections of four points in the re-
quired intersection from which the H- and F-projections may be
found. A sufficient number of points to determine the inter-
section may be found in a similar manner. In this example
the intersection consists of two separate curves.

199. The Intersection of any Two Curved Surfaces. As has

been mentioned in § 186, it is not always possible to find a series
which will cut simultaneous simple sections
of auxiliary surfaces
from each of two given surfaces, even when it may be easily
possible to cut simple sections from each surface when taken
XXVI, § 199] SPHERE AND CYLINDER 285

separately. Such a case, for example, is that of two surfaces

of revolutionwhose axes are not in the same plane, and which,
from the nature of the surfaces, does not fall under any of the

Fio. 331.

cases already discussed. The intersection of two such

surfaces, therefore, may well be taken as illustrative of the
general method of finding the intersection of any two curved
surfaces.
286 DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY [XXVI, § 199

Problem 52. To find the intersection of any two curved surfaces.

(General Case.)
Analysis. It is assumed that neither planes, spheres, nor
other auxiliary surfaces can be found which will intersect
simultaneously both of the given surfaces in straight lines or
circles ; or at least that a sufficient number of points to deter-
mine the required intersection cannot be found in this way.
The solution is then effected by means of auxiliary planes
(§ 186). Pass each plane so as to intersect, if possible, one of
the given surfaces in straight lines or circles. Find the inter-
section of this plane with the second surface, using secondary
auxiliary planes for the purpose. Note the points of inter-
section of the two sections ; they are points on the required
intersection of the given surfaces. In extreme cases, it may
be necessary to find each section which the auxiliary plane cuts
from the given surfaces by secondary auxiliary planes. •

Construction (Pig. 332). The given surfaces are those of a

cone of revolution whose vertex and a torus whose center
is a,

is o. An auxiliary plane M
(VM) can be passed through the
center of the torus parallel to H, which will cut two circles
from the torus, and one circle from the cone. We note in the
fi'-projeetionthe intersection of E'', the circle lying in the cone,
with the circles of the torus, and obtain points 1 and 2 of the
required intersection. A plane N (HN) can be passed through
the vertex, a, of the cone parallel to F, which will intersect the
cone in two straight lines, the contour elements of the V-
projection, and the torus in two circles. The F-projection
gives us six intersections, thus determining points 3, 4, 6, 6, 7,

and 8.

The points already found not being sufficient, and no other

simultaneous straight line or circle intersections being possible,
recourse must be had to the general method. This is illustrated
by the plane B (HE). This plane is taken parallel to V, and
intersects the torus in two circles, projected in Fat C" and D*".

Plane B intersects the cone in a hyperbolic arc projectied

at F". The curve F isfound by using the secondary aux-
iliary planes W, X, T, and Z, parallel to H. (See Pig. 107,
XXVI, § 1991 CONE AND TaRUS 287

§ 86.) The intersections of F" with C" and D" locate four
Doints, 9, 10, 11, and 12, of the intersection of the surfaces.

Fig. 332.

other points to determine this iatersection completely may

be similarly obtained.
*HE following pages contain advertisements of a
few of the Macmillan books on kindred subjects
Electric and Magnetic Measurements

BY

CHARLES M. SMITH
Associate Professor of Physics in Purdue University

i2mo, 368 pp., $2.40

This work is the development of a course of lectures

and laboratory notes which students have used in mimeo-
graph form for several years. The equivalent of one year
of general physics and some knowledge of the calculus are
presupposed, hence the arrangement and treatment are
not always those which would be followed with a class
of beginners. Most of the laboratory exercises are de-

scribed in such a way that particular types of apparatus

are not demanded unless these are well known and gener-
ally available.

The methods described are for the most part standard

ones, with such variations as many years of trial and sug-
gestions from various instructors associated with the course
have shown to be of value.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

FubliBhers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New York
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY
BY

ALEXANDER ZIWET
Professor of Mathematics in the University of Michigan

And LOUIS ALLEN HOPKINS

Instructor in Mathematics in the University of Michigan

Edited by Earle Raymond Hedrick

Flexible cloth, 111., i2ino, viii+jdgpf., $jj6o

Combines with analytic geometry a number of topics, tradi-

tionally treated in college algebra, that depend upon or are
closely associated with geometric representation. If the stu-
dent's preparation in elementary algebra has been good, this
book contains sufficient algebraic material to enable him to
omit the usual course in College Algebra without essential
harm. On the other hand, the book is so arranged that, for
those students who have a college course in algebra, the alge-
braic sections may either be omitted entirely or used only for
review. The book contains a great number of fundamental
applications and problems. Statistics and elementary laws of
Physics are introduced early, even before the usual formulas
for straight lines. Polynomials and other simple explicit func-
tions are dealt with before the more complicated implicit equa-
tions, with the exception of the circle, which is treated early.
The representation of functions is made more prominent than
the study of the geometric properties of special curves. Purely
geometric topics are not neglected.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

Fublishera 64-66 Fiftb Avenue New Tork
 TRIGONOMETRY
BY

ALFRED MONROE KENYON

Professor of Mathematics in Purdue University

And LOUIS INGOLD

Assistant Professor of Mathematics in the University of
Missouri

Edited by Earle Raymond Hedrick

Trigonometry, flexible cloth, pocket size, long i2mo {xi-\- 132 pp.) with Complete
Tables (xviit + 124 pp.) ,
$/.;o
Trigonometry {xi + rj2 pp.) with Brief Tables {xviii -\- 12 pp.), $1.20
Macmillan Logarithmic and Trigonometric Tables, flexible cloth, pocket size, long

izmo (xviii + 124 pp.) ,

$jbo

FROM THE PREFACE

The book contains a miniirum of purely theoretical matter. Its entire
organization is intended to give a clear view of the meaning and the imme-
diate usefulness of Trigonometry. The proofs, however, are in a form that
will not require essential revision in the courses that follow. . . .

The number of exercises is very large, and the traditional monotony is

broken by illustrations from a variety of topics. Here, as well as in the text,

the attempt is often made to lead the student to think for himself by giving
suggestions rather than completed solutions or demonstrations.
The text proper is short; what is there gained in space is used to make the
tables very complete and usable. Attention is called particularly to the com-
'

plete and handily arranged table of squares, square roots, cubes, etc.
by its ;

use the Pythagorean theorem and the Cosine Law become practicable for
actual computation. The use of the slide rule and of four-place tables is
encouraged for problems that do not demand extreme accuracy.
Only a few fundamental definitions and relations in Trigonometry need be
memorized; these are here emphasized. The great body of principles and
processes depends upon these fundamentals; these are presented in this book,
as they should be retained, rather by emphasizing and dwelling upon that
dependence. Otherwise, the subject can have no real educational value, nor
indeed any permanent practical value.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

Fublishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue New Tork
GEOMETRY
BY
WALTER BURTON FORD
Junior Professor of Mathematics in the University of
Michigan

And CHARLES AMMERMAN

The William McKinley High School, St. Louis
Edited by Earle Raymond Hedrick, Professor of Mathematics
in the University of Missouri

Plane and Solid Geometry, cloth, i2mo, 31 g pp., $US

Plane Geometry, cloth, iimo, 213 pp., $ .So
Solid Geometry, cloth, i2mo, 106 pp., $ .80

STRONG POINTS
I. The authors and the editor are well qualified by training and experi-
ence to prepare a textbook on Geometry.
II. As treated in this book, geometry functions in the thought of the
pupil. It means something because its practical applications are shown.
III. The logical as well as the practical side of the subject is emphasized.
IV. The arrangement of material is pedagogical.
V. Basal theorems are printed in black-face type.
VI. The book conforms to the recommendations of the National Com-
mittee on the Teaching of Geometry.
VII. Typography and binding are excellent. The latter is the reenforced
tape binding-that is characteristic of Macmillan textbooks.
" Geometry is likely to remain primarily a cultural, rather than an informa-
tion subject," say the authors in the preface. " But the intimate connection
of geometry with human activities is evident upon every hand, and constitutes
fully as much an integral part of the subject as does its older logical and
scholastic aspect." This connection with human activities, this application
of geometry to real human needs, is emphasized in a great variety of problems
and constructions, so that theory and application are inseparably connected
throughout the book.
These ilhistrations and the many others contained in the book will be seen
to cover a wider range than is usual, even in books that emphasize practical
applications to a questionable extent. This results in a better appreciation
of the significance of the subject on the part of the student, in that he gains a
truer conception of the wide scope of its application.
The logical as well as the practical side of the subject is emphasized.
Definitions, arrangement, and method of treatment are logical. The defi-
nitions are particularly simple, clear, and accurate. The traditional manner
of presentation in a logical system is preserved, with due regard for practical
applications. Proofs, both foimal and informal, are strictly logical.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

Publishers 64-66 Tifth Avenue New York
ELEMENTARY MATHEMATICAL
ANALYSIS
BY

JOHN WESLEY YOUNG

Professor of Mathematics in Dartmouth College

And frank MILLET MORGAN

Assistant Professor of Mathematics in Dartmouth College

Edited by Earle Raymond Hedrick., Professor of Mathematics

in the University of Missouri

Cloth, i2mo, ^42 pp.

A textbook for the freshman year in colleges, universities, and

technical schools, giving a unified treatment of the essentials of
trigonometry, college algebra, and analytic geometry, and intro-
ducing the student to the fundamental conceptions of calculus.
The various subjects are unified by the great centralizing
theme of functionality so that each subject, without losing its
fundamental character, is shown clearly in its relationship to the
others, and to mathematics as a whole.
More emphasis is placed on insight and understanding of
fundamental conceptions and modes of thought less empliasis ;

on algebraic technique and facility of manipulation. Due recog-

nition is given to the cultural motive for the study of mathe-
matics and to the disciplinary value.
The text presupposes only the usual entrance requirements in
elementary algebra and plane geometry.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

Publishers 64-66 Fifth Avenue Hew Tork
THE CALCULUS
BY

ELLERY WILLIAMS DAVIS

Professor of Mathematics, the University of Nebraska

Assisted by William Charles Brenke, Associate Professoi os

Mathematics, the University of Nebraska

Edited by Earle Raymond Hedrick

Cloth, seini-flexibU, xxi +383 pp. + Tables {63), i2mo, $z.io

Edition De Luxe, flexible India paper, $2.50
leather binding,

This book presents as many and as varied applications of the Calculus

as it is possible to do without venturing into technical fields whose subject
matter is itself unknown and incomprehensible to the student, and without
abandoning an orderly presentation of fundamental principles.

The same general tendency has led to the treatment of topics with a view

toward bringing out their essential usefulness. Rigorous forms of demonstra-

tion are not insisted upon, especially where the precisely rigorous proofs
would be beyond the present grasp of the student. Rather the stress is laid

upon the student's certain comprehension of that which is done, and his con-
viction that the results obtained are both reasonable and useful. At the
same time, an effort has been made to avoid those grosser errors and actual
misstatements of fact which have often offended the teacher in texts otherwise
attractive and teachable.
Purely destructive criticism and abandonment of coherent arrangement
are just as dangerous as ultra-conservatism. This book attempts to preserve
the essential features of the Calculus, to give the student a thorough training
in mathematical reasoning, to create in him a sure mathematical imagination,
and to meet fairly the reasonable demand for enlivening and enriching the
subject through applications at the expense of purely formal work that con-
tains no essential principle.

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

Publishers 64-66 rifth Avenue New Tork